(Vface_alternative_font_registry_alist): New variable.
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
d9c9b920 1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2000-10-12
424d8b44 2Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
3787e12e 6For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
f4988be7
GM
11** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
12
424d8b44
DL
13** Support for LynxOS has been added.
14
1fa28578
GM
15** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
16the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
17
18** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
19images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
20to list them.
6344985d 21
d5483ab1 22** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
d874e913 23Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5ed8d5af
DL
24
25** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
26Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
27
28** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
60dd7e0e
DL
29support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the
30maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions.
f4988be7 31
d9c9b920
DL
32** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the
33new display features described below.
34
e90813b8 35** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement
a7c13351 36all of the new display features described below. The port currently
e90813b8 37lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support.
d9c9b920 38
1fa28578
GM
39\f
40* Changes in Emacs 21.1
41
c6f01e00
MB
42** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el.
43To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the
44`auto-compression-mode' command.
45
4c724b32
DL
46** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for
47`browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME.
48
b856f39c 49+++
068127d6
GM
50** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now
51operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode.
52
fd06c7da
MB
53** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs header-line
54(which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window), so that it
55remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled. This behavior
56may be disabled by customizing the option `Info-use-header-line'.
57
8ac08dea 58+++
62c273d7
DL
59** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It
60is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia.
61
62+++
63** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor
64mode `iswitchb-mode'.
65
8ac08dea 66+++
f393cf90
DL
67** Gnus changes.
68
69The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in
70four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment,
71internationalization and mail-fetching.
72
73*** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the
74many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone.
75
76If you used procmail like in
77
78(setq nnmail-use-procmail t)
79(setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail)
80(setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/")
81(setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in")
82
327652be 83this now has changed to
f393cf90
DL
84
85(setq mail-sources
86 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/"
87 :suffix ".in")))
88
89More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods ->
90Getting Mail -> Mail Sources
91
92*** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of
93Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details.
4301cf66
DL
94Separate MIME packages like RMIME, SEMI, mime-compose etc., will
95probably no longer work; remove them and use the native facilities.
f393cf90 96
60dd7e0e 97*** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many
4301cf66
DL
98parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There
99are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is
100now just a compatibility layer.
f393cf90
DL
101
102*** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be
103called to position point.
104
105*** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in
106summary buffers and NOV files.
107
108*** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number
109of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added.
110
111*** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a
112subtly different manner.
113
114*** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive
115and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with
116ever-changing layouts.
117
118*** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap.
119
120*** There is image support.
121
122** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO
d1e68bce
DL
1238859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display
124more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of
125empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a
126window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this
127on.
128
ba9eeda1
GM
129** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be
130set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a
131file that is already visited under a different name.
132
42ac0ae5
GM
133** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to
134nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size.
135
136** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the
137recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is
138signaled.
139
ba9eeda1 140** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM
dab96841
DL
141support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode,
142use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the
143buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands
144M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a
145new command M-x strokes-list-strokes.
146
b941a14b 147+++
ba9eeda1 148** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name
eb27839a 149and displays information about that.
b941a14b 150
ba9eeda1 151** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
83b6997f
GM
152file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
153
d7b38c05 154** Polish and German translations of Emacs' reference card have been
6917e6bb 155added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex' and `de-refcard.tex'.
d7b38c05
GM
156Postscript files are included.
157
158** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
159`dired-ref.tex'.
160
25ad1371
GM
161** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
162expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
163
164This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
165determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
166mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
167interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
168regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
169associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
170
b856f39c 171+++
f0298744
DL
172** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
173displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
174menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
175menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
176
9a8d84ca
DL
177** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
178a version-dependent component.
179
d76c03ea
GM
180** The <delete> function key is now bound to `delete-char' by default.
181Note that this takes effect only on window systems. On TTYs, Emacs
182will receive ASCII 127 when the DEL key is pressed. This
183character is still bound as before.
184
3b4fa1b2
DL
185** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
186using that menu.
187
40e857ea 188** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
424d8b44 189suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
40e857ea 190
beb2eb00 191+++
c08398de
DL
192** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
193buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
194contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
195by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
196insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
197the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
198Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
199
db7a3ede 200+++
3d6cd763
GM
201** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
202coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
203escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
204such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
205recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
07b14857 206always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
3d6cd763 207read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
07b14857
KH
208(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
209RET C-x C-f filename RET.
26ae8525 210
0b8a3a6d
DL
211** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
212environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
213
424d8b44 214+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
215** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
216point in a pop-up window.
217
6d35b49f 218+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
219** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
220displays all characters in that character set.
221
222** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
223coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
224
a4067978 225+++
5cb6a58e 226** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
a4067978
EZ
227on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
228defined on newcomment.el.
5cb6a58e 229
424d8b44 230+++
a1b8d58b
GM
231** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
232
6e417ca5
DL
233** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
234been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
235
424d8b44 236+++
5898e075
DL
237** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
238`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
239indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
240indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
241
424d8b44 242+++
abfcc168
GM
243** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
244sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 245(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
246You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
247
424d8b44 248+++
cc181e95
GM
249** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
250on the display using several methods
251
424d8b44 252+++
cc181e95
GM
253- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
254a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
255be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
256
424d8b44 257+++
cc181e95
GM
258- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
259equivalent ot specifying the frame parameter.
260
da4496b6 261- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
262
263- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
264the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
265
424d8b44 266+++
3b4fa1b2 267** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 268an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 269command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 270does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 271
424d8b44 272+++
176256a1 273** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
274`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
275typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 276
dd0add8e
DL
277** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
278characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
279
bf3ba9ac 280+++
699238d9
GM
281** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
282compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
283this behavior.
284
285The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
286compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
287Emacs dump core.
288
424d8b44 289+++
699238d9 290** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 291
7233c5bd
GM
292*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
293whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
294is useful for debugging X problems.
295
296Example:
297
699238d9 298 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 299
100b3cbb
GM
300*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
301visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
302the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
303and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
304visual class names are
305
306 TrueColor
307 PseudoColor
308 DirectColor
309 StaticColor
310 GrayScale
311 StaticGray
312
313Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
314`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
315meaning.
316
317The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
318supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
319`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
320visual.
321
322Example:
323
699238d9 324 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
325
326*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
327specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
328default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
329resource values are `true' or `on'.
330
331Example:
332
699238d9 333 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 334
0d0c76b8
EZ
335** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
336more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
337now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
338
42088c12 339** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 340display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
341shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
342be customized.
c60ea02e 343
424d8b44 344+++
31047e0d
DL
345** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
346
424d8b44 347+++
b02786f9
GM
348** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
349all frames except the selected one.
350
3261c1d8
DL
351** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
352to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
353
ffe36136 354** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
aa78a4f3
EZ
355the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
356MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
357displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
358
0292b49f 359+++
aa78a4f3
EZ
360** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
361MS-DOS version of Emacs.
ffe36136 362
559cee90
DL
363** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
364read mail from the menu etc.
365
480b5773 366+++
271b4185
GM
367** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
368a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
369
0daee095
GM
370** Changes in Texinfo mode.
371
372** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
373macros
374
375 Key binding Macro
376 -------------------------
377 C-c C-c C-s @strong
378 C-c C-c C-e @emph
379 C-c C-c u @url
380 C-c C-c q @quotation
381 C-c C-c m @email
382
559cee90
DL
383** Changes in Outline mode.
384
385There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
386`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
387the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
388
327652be 389** Changes to Emacs Server
7a912f63 390
c0a8c108
EZ
391+++
392*** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
7a912f63
GM
393with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
394are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
395Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
396buffers to kill, as before.
397
398Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
c0a8c108 399i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
7a912f63
GM
400this way.
401
956777b3
GM
402** Changes to Show Paren mode.
403
404*** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
405The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
406use. Default is 1000.
407
f6989277 408+++
404fa7d6
DL
409** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
410groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
411
424d8b44
DL
412+++
413** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
414M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
415M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
416buffers.
8964fec7 417
424d8b44 418+++
39783d73
WP
419** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
420under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
421.emacs file.
422
423The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
424determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
425
d35fce81
GM
426** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
427abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
428`directory-abbrev-alist'.
429
a933dad1
DL
430** Faces and frame parameters.
431
432There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
433Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
434`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
435`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
436sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
437for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
438parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
439
440Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
441`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 442`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
443`default' face and vice versa.
444
d80061fa 445+++
f77a4a8a
GM
446** New face `menu'.
447
448The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
449Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
450attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
451
424d8b44 452+++
a933dad1
DL
453** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
454
455The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
456colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
457correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
458the screen gamma of a frame's display.
459
460PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
461in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
462color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
463
464The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
465`ScreenGamma'.
466
467** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
468
469The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
470Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
471oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
472of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
473the text.
474
475** Emacs has a new face implementation.
476
477The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
478font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
479height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
480These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
481specify a font.
482
483Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
484These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
485under Lisp changes, below.
486
487** New default font is Courier 12pt.
488
424d8b44
DL
489+++
490** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
491of its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid;
492otherwise, it is hollow.
a933dad1
DL
493
494** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
495truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
496foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
497customizing face `fringe'.
498
499** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
500can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
501
502** LessTif support.
503
424d8b44
DL
504Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see <http://www.lesstif.org>).
505You will need a version 0.88.1 or later.
a933dad1
DL
506
507** Toolkit scroll bars.
508
509Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
510LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
511configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
512bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
513bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
514Emacs.
515
516When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
517Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
518Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
519Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
520define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
521`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
522
523Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
524a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
525directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
526different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
527system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
528add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
529
530The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
531`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
532This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
533image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
534Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
535
536** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
537
538When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
539widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
540Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
541
424d8b44 542+++
a933dad1
DL
543** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
544
545When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
546whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
547defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
548highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
549displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
550whitespace.
551
6e612d4d 552+++
a933dad1
DL
553** Busy-cursor.
554
555Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
556display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
557
424d8b44 558+++
a933dad1
DL
559** Blinking cursor
560
561M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
562terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
563and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
564the group `cursor'.
565
8ac08dea 566+++
a933dad1
DL
567** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
568
569This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
570generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
571See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
572details.
573
574Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
575have to do anything to activate it.
576
577** Tabs and variable-width text.
578
579Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
580defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
581independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
582Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
583
584** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
585
424d8b44 586+++
a933dad1
DL
587*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
588
589 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
590
79dd1637
RS
591The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
592LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 593
79dd1637
RS
594*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
595LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1 596
34d90e29 597+++
a933dad1
DL
598** Hscrolling in C code.
599
cc181e95
GM
600Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
601`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
602customized.
a933dad1 603
8ac08dea 604+++
a933dad1
DL
605** Tool bar support.
606
607Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
d9c9b920
DL
608of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level
609changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is
610displayed. To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of
611extra icons for specific modes (with copyright assignments).
a933dad1 612
424d8b44 613+++
a933dad1
DL
614** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
615
616Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
617mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
618line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
619about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
620in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
621
622Currently, the following actions have been defined:
623
624- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
625buffers.
626
627- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
628M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
629
630- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
631
424d8b44
DL
632- Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
633`*') toggles the status.
a933dad1
DL
634
635- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
636
637** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
638
639When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 640from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
641non-nil.
642
643** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
644
645Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
646Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
647the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
648italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
649Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
163ea954
RS
650attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
651on terminals.
a933dad1 652
54a9404d
EZ
653The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now
654supported on character terminals.
655
a933dad1
DL
656** Sound support
657
2f516940 658Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 659driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 660supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1 661
424d8b44 662+++
a933dad1
DL
663** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
664the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
665forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
666value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
667users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
668even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
669
670The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
671
0e18b431 672+++
a933dad1
DL
673** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
674
675As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
676drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
677`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
678
fdd8bb68 679+++
a933dad1
DL
680** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
681bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
682
683This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
684`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
685variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
686
c5d00c64 687+++
a933dad1
DL
688** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
689
690When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
691value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
692number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 693fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
a933dad1
DL
694
695When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
696value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
697number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 698fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
a933dad1
DL
699
700** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
701notably at the end of lines.
702
703All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
704spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
705
424d8b44 706+++
eee54b0e
DL
707There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
708
a933dad1
DL
709** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
710query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
711after each match to get the replacement text.
712
00782214 713+++
d5483ab1
GM
714** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
715you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0 716
424d8b44 717** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', lets
4ff40dd0
GM
718you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
719lisp-complete-symbol.
720
7af69644 721+++
a933dad1
DL
722** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
723
163ea954 724If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
a299a6f0
GM
725longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it
726is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum
727minibuffer window size by setting the following variables:
a933dad1
DL
728
729- User option: max-mini-window-height
730
731Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
732fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
a299a6f0 733specifies a number of lines.
a933dad1
DL
734
735Default is 0.25.
736
a299a6f0
GM
737- User option: resize-mini-windows
738
739How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always
740resize ot fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows
741grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk
742again.
743
744Default is `grow-only'.
745
2f72fd2f
GM
746** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
747
0d43b60d
GM
748** Changes to hideshow.el
749
750Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
327652be
TTN
751selection and traversal, includes more isearch support, and has more
752conventional keybindings.
0d43b60d
GM
753
754*** Generalized block selection and traversal
755
756A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
757(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
758which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
759`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
760point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
761(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
762
763If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
764i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
765backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
766the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
767
768*** Isearch support for updating mode line
769
770During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
771blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
772line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
773portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
774is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
775
776To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
777something like this in your .emacs.
778
779 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
780 (lambda ()
781 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
782
327652be
TTN
783*** New customization var: `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function'
784
785Normally, `hs-hide-all' hides everything, leaving only the
786header lines of top-level forms (and comments, unless var
787`hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is non-nil). It does this by
788moving point to each top-level block beginning and hiding the
789block there. In some major modes (for example, Java), this
790behavior results in few blocks left visible, which may not be so
791useful.
792
793You can now set var `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' to a
794function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead
795of the normal block-hiding function. For example, the following
796code defines a function to hide one level down and move point
797appropriately, and then tells hideshow to use the new function.
798
799(defun ttn-hs-hide-level-1 ()
800 (hs-hide-level 1)
801 (forward-sexp 1))
802(setq hs-hide-all-non-comment-function 'ttn-hs-hide-level-1)
803
804The name `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' was chosen to
805emphasize that this function is not called for comment blocks,
806only for code blocks.
807
808*** Command deleted: `hs-show-region'
809
810Historical Note: This command was added to handle "unbalanced
811parentheses" emergencies back when hideshow.el used selective
812display for implementation.
813
814*** Commands rebound to more conventional keys
815
816The hideshow commands used to be bound to keys of the form "C-c
817LETTER". This is contrary to the Emacs keybinding convention,
818which reserves that space for user modification. Here are the
819new bindings (which includes the addition of `hs-toggle-hiding'):
820
821 hs-hide-block C-c C-h
822 hs-show-block C-c C-s
823 hs-hide-all C-c C-M-h
824 hs-show-all C-c C-M-s
825 hs-hide-level C-c C-l
826 hs-toggle-hiding C-c C-c
827 hs-mouse-toggle-hiding [(shift button-2)]
828
829These were chosen to roughly imitate those used by Outline mode.
830
559cee90
DL
831** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
832
424d8b44 833+++
1b24b888
GM
834*** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes
835an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
559cee90
DL
836log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
837
424d8b44 838+++
1b24b888
GM
839**** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the
840current buffer.
424d8b44
DL
841
842+++
1b24b888
GM
843*** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries
844in a log file.
eb2aac9d 845
502004be 846+++
1b24b888
GM
847*** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log
848entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
eb2aac9d 849
502004be 850+++
1b24b888 851*** Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
424d8b44
DL
852version number is performed based on regular expressions from
853`change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be cutomized.
854Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
eb2aac9d 855
2c63c979 856*** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting.
1b24b888 857
79c78e77
GM
858** Changes to cmuscheme
859
860*** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed
861`cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el.
862
3476b54a
GM
863** Changes in Font Lock
864
865*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
866font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major
867mode.
868
2c63c979
SM
869*** multiline patterns are now supported.
870
b3b98592
GM
871** Comint (subshell) changes
872
988cded7
MB
873These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which
874include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc.
875
876*** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp'
877to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which
878parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the
879user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use
880this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line,
881respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this
882feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option
883`comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'.
884
885*** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
b3b98592
GM
886and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
887
988cded7 888*** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
b3b98592
GM
889buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
890buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
891
892The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
893M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
894the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
895
988cded7
MB
896*** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts,
897and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features,
898see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
31fc5d15 899
988cded7 900*** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s')
d648cc45
MB
901saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix
902argument, it appends to the file.
903
988cded7 904*** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output'
d648cc45
MB
905(usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for
906compatibility.
907
0e40b809
EL
908*** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input
909ring (history).
d648cc45 910
e26cec67
GM
911** Changes to Rmail mode
912
c0510d27
GM
913*** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
914set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
915receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
916recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
917`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
918as correspondent.
919
920Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
921mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 922regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 923
3b55acc9
GM
924*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
925to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
926Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
927with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
928for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
929
6a1950ec
GM
930*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
931like `j'.
932
5bb6f079
RS
933*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
934specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 935digest message.
e26cec67 936
993d8b7d
DL
937*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
938in which folder to put messages automatically.
939
400a1ed0
GM
940** Changes to TeX mode
941
942The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
943`latex-mode'.
944
a933dad1
DL
945** Changes to RefTeX mode
946
947*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
948 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
949 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
950 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
951 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
952 can be edited from that buffer.
953
954*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
955 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
956 `A' to use all marked entries).
957
958*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
959 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
960
961*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
962 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
963 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
964 been cited.
965
38de9631
GM
966** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
967The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
968semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
969in column 1 are always made leaves.
970
a933dad1
DL
971** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
972has the following new features:
973
974*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
975may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
976to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
977time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
978
979*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
980feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
981file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
982compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
983pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
984defaults to 1.
985
5d94f558 986** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
b675095c
GM
987file names.
988
424d8b44 989+++
a933dad1
DL
990** Tooltips.
991
992Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
993mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
994can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
995
996Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
997variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
998the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
999tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
1000
424d8b44 1001+++
a933dad1
DL
1002** Customize changes
1003
1004*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
1005`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
1006cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
1007
1008*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
1009Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
1010default).
1011
0ae51efb
GM
1012*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
1013between custom options. Example:
1014
1015 (defcustom default-input-method nil
1016 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
1017 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
1018 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
1019 :group 'mule
1020 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
1021 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
1022
1023This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
1024current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
1025first in a custom-set-variables statement.
1026
a933dad1
DL
1027** New features in evaluation commands
1028
5e03eb84 1029*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
1030modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
1031print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
1032customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
1033eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
1034
5e03eb84
GM
1035*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
1036code when called with a prefix argument.
1037
ead53494
GM
1038** Ispell changes
1039
37d8a691 1040+++
bbe15990
EZ
1041*** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
1042transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
ead53494
GM
1043spell-checks the current buffer.
1044
37d8a691 1045+++
385ff9e3
GM
1046*** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
1047added.
1048
1049*** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
1050correction is made and re-checked.
1051
74ec6045 1052*** An Italian and a Portuguese dictionary definition has been added.
385ff9e3
GM
1053
1054*** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
1055cases.
1056
1057*** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
1058on syntax errors.
1059
1060*** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
1061end of the buffer.
1062
a933dad1
DL
1063** Dired changes
1064
1065*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
1066command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
1067is, delete only empty directories.
1068
1069*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
1070command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
1071copy directories recursively.
1072
f6737cde
GM
1073*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
1074in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
1075the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
1076
2f72fd2f
GM
1077*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
1078replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
1079directory.
1080
7381ae05
MB
1081*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
1082a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
1083This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
1084will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
1085accurate or inaccurate as it is.
1086
e024b101
GM
1087*** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
1088from ls switches.
1089
60b392a7
MB
1090*** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use
1091of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename,
1092which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single
1093source file, not when operating on multiple marked files.
1094
a933dad1
DL
1095** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
1096use the -f option when sending mail.
1097
b1c609b1
GM
1098** CC mode changes.
1099
1100Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
1101current user setups (although it's believed that these
1102incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
1103However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
1104back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
1105compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
1106release.
1107
7972fcfc
GM
1108*** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
1109This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
1110of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
1111non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
1112want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
1113have to bother.
1114
1115Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
1116situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
487522fe 1117and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
7972fcfc
GM
1118If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
1119the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
1120by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
1121
b1c609b1
GM
1122*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
1123When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
1124variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
1125take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
1126is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
1127settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
1128possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
1129Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
1130
1131By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
1132special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
1133the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
1134of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
1135above.
1136
1137Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
1138when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
1139function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
1140call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
1141then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
1142values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
1143only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
1144function documentation for more info.
1145
1146The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
1147especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
1148with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
1149intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
1150such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
1151is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
1152configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
1153global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
1154
1155(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
1156
1157**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
1158This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
1159
1160This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
1161variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
1162completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
1163the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
1164empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
1165style system.
1166
1167**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
1168In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
1169c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
1170as far as possible.
1171
1172*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
1173CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
1174surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
1175chapter about this in the manual.
1176
1177**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
1178The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
1179recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
1180primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
1181adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
1182
1183**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
1184This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
1185c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
1186
1187**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
1188This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
1189
1190It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
1191Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
1192A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
1193inside CC Mode.
1194
1195Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
1196causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
1197the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
1198available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
1199cc-mode/).
1200
1201**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
1202The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
1203specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
1204literals.
1205
1206**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
1207It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
1208prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
1209you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
1210this function.
1211
1212*** Fixes to IDL mode.
1213It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
1214to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
1215struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
1216Thanks to Eric Eide.
1217
1218*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
1219It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
1220opening braces hangs and when they don't.
1221
1222**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
1223
1224*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
1225See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
1226better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
1227and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
1228
1229*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
1230previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
1231the column specified by comment-column.
1232
1233*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
1234In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
1235is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
1236prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
1237contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
1238don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
1239
1240*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
1241instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
1242arguments.
1243
1244*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
1245
1246*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
1247c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
1248c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
1249variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
1250Provan).
1251
1252*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
1253
c407c570
GM
1254** Makefile mode changes
1255
1256*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
1257
5d94f558 1258*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
c407c570
GM
1259Fontlock mode is active.
1260
87be76f6
GM
1261** Isearch changes
1262
3353ef5a
GM
1263*** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
1264so that searches can be resumed.
1265
1266*** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
c407c570
GM
1267respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
1268that started the search.
1269
87be76f6 1270*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
1271selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
1272
c8a8458a 1273+++
87be76f6
GM
1274*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
1275
d35fce81 1276Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
1277`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
1278search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
1279before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
1280highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
5d94f558 1281`secondary-selection'.
87be76f6
GM
1282
1283The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
1284will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
1285Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
1286using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
1287usual snappy response.
1288
1289If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
1290matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
1291set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
1292isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
1293
21bc6203 1294+++
35384f06
GM
1295** Changes in sort.el
1296
1297The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 1298as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
21bc6203 1299new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
35384f06 1300numeric base.
87be76f6 1301
d7b511c4
GM
1302** Changes to Ange-ftp
1303
424d8b44 1304+++
d7b511c4 1305*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
1306names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
1307sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
1308
d7b511c4
GM
1309*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
1310ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
1311
9d453139
SS
1312*** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
1313output ^M at the end of lines.
1314
4b9347b3
GM
1315** Shell script mode changes.
1316
1317Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
1318derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
1319sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
1320
79214ddf
FP
1321** Etags changes.
1322
1323*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
1324
aca0be23 1325*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
1326possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
1327{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
1328This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
1329a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 1330
79214ddf
FP
1331*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
1332declarations when given the --declarations option.
1333
1334*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 1335"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
1336
1337*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
1338types.
1339
de370c4c 1340*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
1341
1342*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
1343
1344*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
1345are now tagged.
1346
1347*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
1348variables are tagged.
1349
1350*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
1351
8dc78b52
FP
1352*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
1353for PSWrap.
79214ddf 1354
c8d94f86 1355+++
f6737cde
GM
1356** Changes in etags.el
1357
3f6e4b8b
GM
1358*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
1359tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
1360is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
1361
f6737cde
GM
1362*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
1363the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
1364
1365If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
1366FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
1367TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1368obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1369
1370TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1371
1372FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1373List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1374
1375A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1376
1377 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1378 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1379 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1380
1381*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1382of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1383
1384*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1385names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1386
424d8b44 1387+++
fbc164de
PE
1388** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1389and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1390LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1391
c3eb1f10 1392+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
1393** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1394Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
13958859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
f6499c03
DL
1396GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet; there are basic 8859-14 and
13978859-15 fonts at <URL:http://czyborra.com/charsets/> and recent X
1398releases have 8859-15. There are new Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix
1399(only) and Polish slash input methods in Leim.
59c1bf85 1400
424d8b44 1401+++
163ea954 1402** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1403remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1404appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1405
1406** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1407
424d8b44 1408+++
6f8ea2ae
DL
1409** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1410
6ab8d72d 1411+++
f6499c03 1412** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps'
c0510d27
GM
1413containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1414expression from that list, are not checked.
1415
5d94f558
SS
1416** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
1417When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
1418and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
1419the buffer, just like for the local files.
1420
dc28878c
GM
1421** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
1422
df8a9f78 1423+++
95931eb1
GM
1424** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now
1425displays local abbrevs, only.
1426
54baed30
GM
1427** VC Changes
1428
1429VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it
1430easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp
1431Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism
1432to enable and disable support for particular version systems has
1433changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable
1434`vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of atoms that identify
1435version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file,
1436each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the
1437file is registered in that backend.
1438
1439When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed
1440backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the
1441directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for
1442master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then
1443the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen.
1444As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete.
1445
1446The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC
1447still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for
1448RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables
1449vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS
1450where it doesn't make sense.)
1451
1452The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also
1453obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude
1454`CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now.
1455
1456*** General Changes
1457
1458The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding
1459checks are always done now.
1460
327652be 1461VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control
54baed30
GM
1462operations.
1463
c286608e
SM
1464`vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'.
1465`vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'.
1466`vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'.
1467
54baed30
GM
1468*** Changes for CVS
1469
1470There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the
1471default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in
1472remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined
1473by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a
1474regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts
1475that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC
1476queries the repository just as often as it does for local files.
1477
1478If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the
1479repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit.
1480If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to
1481commit, you can either use C-u C-x v m to perform an update on the
1482current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an
1483entire directory tree.
1484
1485The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call
1486"cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option
1487is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are
1488"watched" by other developers.)
1489
1490*** Lisp Changes in VC
1491
1492VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now
1493add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a
1494library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and
1495then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for
1496a version system named FOO, you write a library named vc-foo.el, which
1497provides a number of functions vc-foo-... (see commentary at the end
1498of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library,
1499you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the atom
1500`FOO' to the list `vc-handled-backends'.
1501
a933dad1
DL
1502** New modes and packages
1503
4473cdd9
JW
1504+++
1505*** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell
1506implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it.
1507It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp
1508functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports
1509history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It
1510will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of
1511the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been
1512rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell,
1513all within the scope of your Emacs process.
1514
ff332647 1515+++
90cbf47e
GM
1516*** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
1517intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
1518typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
1519on certain projects.
1520
894ca69e 1521+++
90cbf47e 1522*** The new package hi-lock.el, text matching interactively entered
d96d6bb0 1523regexp's can be highlighted. For example,
abb2db1c 1524
d96d6bb0 1525 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
abb2db1c
GM
1526
1527will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
1528face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
1529typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
1530Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
1531appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
1532current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
1533corresponding file is read.
1534
424d8b44 1535+++
d96d6bb0 1536*** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
abb2db1c
GM
1537Emacs is idle.
1538
31fc5d15
GM
1539*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1540parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1541
5cb6a58e
SM
1542*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1543package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1544be more robust while offering the same functionality.
1545
424d8b44 1546+++
578979ee
GM
1547*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1548facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1549separate Texinfo file.
1550
424d8b44
DL
1551+++
1552*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
1553by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1554provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
1555`log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
1556enter checkin log messages.
dc1178bf 1557
424d8b44 1558+++
6abca616
EZ
1559*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1560without invoking external programs.
1561
1562The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1563and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1564`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1565is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1566Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1567
1568The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1569page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1570
719e2c6e 1571+++
5e5dff44
GM
1572*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1573authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1574
1575The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1576the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1577the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1578Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1579even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1580single step.
1581
1582On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1583matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1584probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1585contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1586
424d8b44 1587+++
f7136ee8
GM
1588*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1589unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1590actually modifying content of a buffer.
1591
bbd9b566
GM
1592*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1593PostScript.
1594
1595Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1596
1597The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1598
1599 ; comment (until end of line)
1600 A non-terminal
1601 "C" terminal
1602 ?C? special
1603 $A default non-terminal
1604 $"C" default terminal
1605 $?C? default special
1606 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1607 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1608 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1609 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1610 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1611 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1612 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1613 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1614 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1615 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1616 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1617 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1618 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1619 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1620 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1621
1622Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1623
99453a38
GM
1624*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1625align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1626determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1627example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1628equal signs of assignments.
1629
424d8b44 1630+++
559cee90
DL
1631*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1632paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1633
424d8b44 1634+++
6448a6b3
GM
1635*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1636list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1637buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1638customize the package.
1639
6344985d
GM
1640*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1641
249652b1
GM
1642*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1643replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1644is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1645and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1646not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1647which answers different needs.
1648
424d8b44 1649+++
3476b54a
GM
1650*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1651suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1652expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1653course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1654reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1655to be enabled.
1656
424d8b44 1657+++
8964fec7
SM
1658*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1659containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1660
424d8b44 1661+++
a933dad1
DL
1662*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1663
424d8b44 1664+++
a933dad1
DL
1665*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1666
1667*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1668
8901d1ac
GM
1669Please note: if `ansi-color-for-shell-mode' and
1670`global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will
1671disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to
1672`comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This
1673displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground
1674and background colors.
1675
a933dad1
DL
1676*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1677Pascal) language.
1678
f6499c03 1679+++
a933dad1
DL
1680*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1681the text at point.
1682
1683*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1684
424d8b44 1685+++
8d54eb69
DL
1686*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1687
a933dad1
DL
1688*** whitespace.el ???
1689
ebcfda83
GM
1690*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1691files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1692(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1693interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1694often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1695uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1696codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1697
1698*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1699
1700Here is an example of columns:
1701
1702horse apple bus
1703dog pineapple car EXTRA
1704porcupine strawberry airplane
1705
1706Doing the following settings:
1707
1708 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1709 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1710 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1711 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1712
1713
1714Selecting the lines above and typing:
1715
1716 M-x delimit-columns-region
1717
1718It results:
1719
1720[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1721[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1722[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1723
1724delim-col has the following options:
1725
1726 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1727 before all columns.
1728
1729 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1730 between each column.
1731
1732 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1733 after all columns.
1734
1735 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1736 each column.
1737
1738delim-col has the following commands:
1739
1740 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1741 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1742
424d8b44 1743+++
f507826c 1744*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
31fc5d15
GM
1745were operated on recently.
1746
1747M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode.
f507826c 1748
31fc5d15
GM
1749M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable
1750recentf at Emacs startup.
f507826c 1751
31fc5d15
GM
1752M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu
1753filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent
1754file list can be displayed:
f507826c 1755
31fc5d15
GM
1756- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
1757- sorted by file pathes, file names, ascending or descending.
1758- showing pathes relative to the current default-directory
f507826c 1759
31fc5d15
GM
1760The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
1761dynamically change the menu appearance.
f507826c 1762
8062f458
DL
1763*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1764text.
1765
424d8b44 1766+++
36e24b82 1767*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1768of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1769specific to Message mode.
1770
424d8b44 1771+++
36e24b82
DL
1772*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1773viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1774with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1775
424d8b44 1776+++
aaa659ef
DL
1777*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1778interface to access directory servers using different directory
1779protocols. It has a separate manual.
1780
eee54b0e
DL
1781*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1782for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1783
424d8b44 1784+++
612839b6
GM
1785*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1786
5d94f558 1787*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
612839b6 1788minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1789
399da7e3
DL
1790*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1791with the diary features.
1792
6e417ca5
DL
1793*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1794numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1795
4a27bdfb
GM
1796*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
1797Fill mode.
1798
60dd7e0e
DL
1799*** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in
1800Gnus facilities.
1801
dace60cf
JW
1802*** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion
1803facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main
1804difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning
1805they can be profiled, debugged, etc.
a18a342d 1806
965bc065
DL
1807+++
1808** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping
1809paragraphs filled as you modify them.
1810
1811+++
1812** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files
1813to be visited as images.
1814
a933dad1
DL
1815** Withdrawn packages
1816
1817*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1818functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1819
3261c1d8
DL
1820*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1821
1822*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
1823
1824\f
1825* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
1826(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
1827
4301cf66
DL
1828** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum",
1829currently using the `md5sum' program.
1830
6bc92b2e
GM
1831** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually
1832deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame
1833being deleted.
1834
39e776cd
SM
1835** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg.
1836
a18a342d 1837+++
1396138a 1838** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed.
a18a342d
DL
1839If a range in a regular expression or the arg of
1840skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends
1841with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is
1842C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's
1843charset.
1844
4fbdfdcf
MB
1845+++
1846** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in
1847the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the
1848message.
1849
6a0b0752
MB
1850** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an
1851expression with auto-compression-mode enabled.
1852
47e351a3
GM
1853** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced
1854with the more general `:mask' property.
1855
ba9eeda1
GM
1856** Image specifications accept more `:algorithm's.
1857
a2bd77b8
GM
1858** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a
1859backslash.
1860
424d8b44
DL
1861+++
1862** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
1863is running in batch mode. For example,
1864
1865 (message "%s" (read t))
1866
1867will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
1868to standard output.
1869
1870+++
1871** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
1872`kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
1873
ead53494
GM
1874** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
1875will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
1876frame or window.
1877
f6499c03 1878+++
27848c01
GM
1879** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
1880were added
1881
1882- Function: remove ELT SEQ
1883
1884Return a copy of SEQ with all occurences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
1885a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
1886
1887- Function: remq ELT LIST
1888
1889Return a copy of LIST with all occurences of ELT removed. The
1890comparison is done with `eq'.
1891
1892** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
3ab82477 1893
b548072f
GM
1894** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
1895has been changed.
1896
424d8b44 1897+++
07b14857
KH
1898** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
1899without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
1900convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
1901
9662da0b
GM
1902** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
1903or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
d5aa31d8 1904
7fce7efb
DL
1905** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
1906function was declared obsolete.
1907
5d94f558 1908** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
7fce7efb
DL
1909retained as an alias).
1910
f98d3086
SM
1911** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
1912It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
1913is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
1914
87efd256
GM
1915** The new function `window-list' has been defined
1916
1917- Function: window-list &optional WINDOW MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES
1918
1919Return a list of windows in canonical order. The parameters WINDOW,
1920MINIBUF and ALL-FRAMES are defined like for `next-window'.
1921
67c9a1d2
GM
1922** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
1923
1924- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
1925
1926Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
1927
1928This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
1929calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
1930argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
1931value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
1932returned.
1933
1934Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
1935if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
1936it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
1937minibuffer even if it is active.
1938
1939Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
1940counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
1941too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
1942and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
1943`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
1944entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
1945
1946ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
1947ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
1948ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
1949ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
1950ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
1951If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
1952Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
1953
ead53494
GM
1954** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
1955event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
1956argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
dce6b995 1957
25fa6deb
GM
1958** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
1959call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
088831a6
GM
1960message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
1961Default value is nil.
25fa6deb 1962
5d94f558 1963** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
1964meaning no limit.
1965
5d94f558 1966** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
c08398de
DL
1967coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
1968DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
1969
80c05bd3 1970** The function `subr-arity' provides information on the argument list
de370c4c
DL
1971of a primitive.
1972
c286608e
SM
1973** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps.
1974
80c05bd3
DL
1975** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
1976buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
1977This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
1978than replacing the local map.
1979
4bc7a543
DL
1980** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
1981after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
1982
1983** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
1984
f6499c03 1985+++
c286608e
SM
1986** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments,
1987as promised long ago.
f0298744 1988
5d94f558 1989** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
a933dad1
DL
1990\f
1991* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
1992
1993Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1994--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1995When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1996so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1997
85c75536
MB
1998*** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
1999buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
2000the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
2001restriction to be restored incorrectly.
2002
0b8a3a6d
DL
2003*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
2004`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
2005when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
2006multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
2007
2008*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
2009`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
2010contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
2011
2012*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
2013changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
2014[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
2015regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
2016the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
2017extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
2018bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
2019eight-bit-graphic.
2020
2021** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
2022
2023A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
2024a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
2025character set as previously.
2026
2027*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
2028They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
2029modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
2030
2031CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
2032characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
2033range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
2034case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
2035
2036FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
2037name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
2038
2039*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
2040registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
2041"fontset-default".
2042
2043*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
2044argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
2045
2046** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
2047composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
2048buffers and strings.
2049
2050*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
2051character' which is an independent character with a unique character
2052code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
2053have been deleted: composite-char-component,
2054composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
2055composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
2056The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
2057also been deleted.
2058
2059*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
2060specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
2061`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
2062
2063*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
2064MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
2065composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
2066may differ between buffer and string text.
2067
2068*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
2069COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
2070
2071*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
2072directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
2073Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
2074`composition' from STRING.
2075
2076*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
2077a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
2078
2079*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
2080obsolete.
2081
965bc065 2082** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff',
f620908e 2083`mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' are introduced
965bc065 2084for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF, U+2500..U+33FF,
f620908e 2085U+E000..U+FFFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d
DL
2086
2087** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
2088`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
2089X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
2090
2091+++
2092** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2093are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
f98d3086 20940xA0..0xFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 2095
399da7e3 2096+++
f0124b4a
DL
2097** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
2098that offset in the file before writing.
2099
f98d3086
SM
2100** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
2101compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 2102
612839b6
GM
2103** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
2104`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
2105from which the command was issued.
2106
2107** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
2108`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
2109`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
2110additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
2111operate on.
2112
271b4185
GM
2113** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
2114to `window-buffer-height'.
2115
2116- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
2117
2118Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
2119The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
2120lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
2121
2122Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
2123respectively.
2124
2125If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
2126COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
2127
2128The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
2129obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
2130on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
2131
2132Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
2133buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
2134possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
2135is currently displayed in some window.
2136
3c30cb6e
DL
2137** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
2138argument function's results.
2139
62f20204
GM
2140** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
2141signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
2142
c0510d27 2143** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
b4da8dfa 2144header in the list of headers passed to it.
c0510d27
GM
2145
2146** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
2147ignores differences in case and text representation.
2148
2149** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
2150cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
2151as follows:
2152
2153 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
2154 nil don't display a cursor
2155 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
2156 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
2157 others display a box cursor.
2158
9a0dd3dc
GM
2159** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
2160an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
2161defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
2162set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
2163
d7b511c4 2164** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 2165specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
2166the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
2167text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
2168
2169Example:
2170
2171 (string-to-syntax "()")
2172 => (4 . 41)
2173
1fa28578
GM
2174** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
2175other than 10.
2176
2177*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
2178INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
2179
5d94f558 2180 #b1111
1fa28578 2181 => 15
5d94f558 2182 #b-1111
1fa28578
GM
2183 => -15
2184
2185*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
2186
5d94f558 2187 #o666
1fa28578
GM
2188 => 438
2189
2190*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
2191
5d94f558 2192 #xbeef
1fa28578
GM
2193 => 48815
2194
2195*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
2196
5d94f558 2197 #2R-111
1fa28578 2198 => -7
5d94f558 2199 #25rah
1fa28578
GM
2200 => 267
2201
3d4ff2dd 2202** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 2203the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
2204and isn't a string.
2205
3d4ff2dd
GM
2206** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
2207a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
2208value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
2209not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
2210
16ce590d
DL
2211+++
2212** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
2213
73825616 2214** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
2215for a regexp in a string.
2216
2217** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
2218`mouse-position-function'.
2219
723e779c
GM
2220** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
2221that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
2222
d1e103b2
GM
2223** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
2224Keywords are now always considered constants.
2225
31047e0d
DL
2226+++
2227** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
2228returns it.
2229
7a85e4df
GM
2230** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
2231returned by function `recent-keys'.
2232
02b14400
RS
2233+++
2234** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
2235can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
2236Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
2237etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
2238mode.
404fa7d6 2239
02b14400 2240+++
8964fec7
SM
2241** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
2242and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
2243
02b14400
RS
2244+++
2245** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
2246has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
2247function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
2248returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
2249been performed."
2250
2251When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
2252and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
2253hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
2254then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 2255
02b14400 2256+++
81da8b32
GM
2257** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
2258In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
2259and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
2260
02b14400 2261+++
9e207b90
GM
2262** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
2263with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
2264specified table.
2265
2266 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
2267
2268Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
2269TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
2270saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
2271what BODY returns.
9e207b90 2272
02b14400 2273+++
d7f89643 2274** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 2275Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8964fec7 2276
02b14400 2277+++
dde9e75a
GM
2278** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
2279removed since it wasn't used by anything.
2280
02b14400 2281+++
9da30515
GM
2282** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
2283instead of being optional.
2284
02b14400 2285+++
d20679eb
GM
2286** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
2287modify read-only text.
2288
02b14400 2289+++
fbc164de
PE
2290** New functions and variables for locales.
2291
2292The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
2293decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
2294time functions like strftime. The new variables
2295`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
2296locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
2297
2298The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
2299environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
2300the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
2301environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
2302not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
2303`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
2304`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 2305
02b14400 2306+++
863476d1
SM
2307** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
2308To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
2309modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
2310start sequences.
2311
02b14400 2312+++
ef6d912c
GM
2313** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
2314because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
2315
02b14400 2316+++
a933dad1
DL
2317** New function `propertize'
2318
2319The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
2320strings with text properties.
2321
2322- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
2323
2324Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
2325by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
2326PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
2327specified value of that property. Example:
2328
2329 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
2330
2331+++
2332** push and pop macros.
2333
02b14400
RS
2334Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
2335are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
2336as the place that holds the list to be changed.
2337
2338(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
2339(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
2340 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
2341
02b14400
RS
2342** New dolist and dotimes macros.
2343
6c7fd5aa
RS
2344Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
2345are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
2346
2347(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
2348 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
2349 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
2350 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2351
2352(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
2353 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
2354 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
2355 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2356
a933dad1
DL
2357+++
2358** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
2359as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
2360
2361[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
2362[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
2363[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
2364[:blank:] matches space and tab only
2365[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
2366 space, and DEL.
2367[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
2368 and DEL.
2369[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
2370 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2371 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2372[:alpha:] matches letters.
2373 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2374 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2375[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
2376[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
2377[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
2378[:punct:] matches punctuation.
2379 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2380 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
2381[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
2382[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
2383[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
2384
2385+++
2386** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
2387
2388The following functions are defined for hash tables:
2389
2390- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
2391
2392The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
2393are optional. The following arguments are defined:
2394
2395:test TEST
2396
2397TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
2398Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
2399it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
2400
2401:size SIZE
2402
2403SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
2404many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
2405
2406:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
2407
2408REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
2409full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
2410size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
24111.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
2412old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
2413
2414:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
2415
2416THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
2417hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
2418(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
2419
2420:weakness WEAK
2421
b548072f
GM
2422WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
2423`key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
2424`key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
2425collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
2426outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
a933dad1
DL
2427
2428- Function: makehash &optional TEST
2429
2430Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
2431
2432- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
2433
2434Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
2435
2436- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
2437
2438Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
2439values are shared.
2440
2441- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
2442
2443Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
2444
2445- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2446
2447Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
2448
2449- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
2450
2451Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
2452
2453- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2454
2455Returns the size of TABLE.
2456
d96d6bb0 2457- Function: hash-table-test TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2458
2459Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
2460
2461- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
2462
2463Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
2464
2465- Function: clrhash TABLE
2466
2467Clear TABLE.
2468
2469- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
2470
2471Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
2472not found.
2473
79214ddf 2474- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2475
2476Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
2477another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
2478
2479- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
2480
2481Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
2482
2483- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
2484
2485Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
2486arguments KEY and VALUE.
2487
2488- Function: sxhash OBJ
2489
2490Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
2491
2492- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
2493
2494Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
2495a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 2496comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
2497and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
2498of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
2499
2500TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
2501
2502HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
2503code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
2504integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
2505
2506Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
2507be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
2508
2509 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
2510 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
2511
2512 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
2513 (sxhash (upcase a)))
2514
79214ddf 2515 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
2516 'case-fold-string-hash))
2517
2518 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
2519
2520+++
2521** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
2522
2523It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
2524circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
2525a cons cell which is its own cdr.
2526
2527+++
2528** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
2529
2530If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
2531#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
2532
a933dad1
DL
2533+++
2534** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
2535t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
2536specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
2537is too short to reach that column.
2538
2539+++
2540** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
2541now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
2542after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
2543two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
2544
2545If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
2546perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
2547and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
2548
2549+++
2550** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
2551to specify which buffer to return the size of.
2552
2553+++
2554** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
2555calendar-move-hook after moving point.
2556
2557+++
2558** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
2559directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
2560small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
2561small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
2562temporary-file-directory instead.
2563
2564+++
2565** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
2566the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
2567`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
2568hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
2569
2570+++
2571** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
2572elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
2573
2574+++
2575** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
2576
2577make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
2578creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
2579ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
2580
2581+++
2582** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
2583
2584The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
2585on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
2586is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
2587never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
2588ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
2589overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
2590
2591If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
2592that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
2593to get an error if the file exists at that time.
2594The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
2595
2596+++
2597** Function `format' now handles text properties.
2598
2599Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
2600If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
2601ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
2602result string.
2603
2604Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
2605string where arguments appear in the result string.
2606
2607Example:
2608
2609 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
2610 (s2 "world"))
2611 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
2612 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 2613 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
2614
2615results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
2616
2617+++
2618** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
2619
2620Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
2621The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
2622argument in it.
2623
2624 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
2625 (arg "world"))
2626 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
2627 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
2628 (message msg arg))
2629
2630+++
2631** Sound support
2632
2633Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
2634(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
2635
2636Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
2637(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
2638to enable sound support.
2639
2640Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
2641list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
2642when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
2643functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
2644sound to play, before playing the sound.
2645
2646The following sound properties are supported:
2647
2648- `:file FILE'
2649
2650FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
2651searched relative to `data-directory'.
2652
6fb40beb
GM
2653- `:data DATA'
2654
2655DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
2656may be present, but not both.
2657
a933dad1
DL
2658- `:volume VOLUME'
2659
2660VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
26610..1. This property is optional.
2662
2663Other properties are ignored.
2664
2665** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4
DL
2666
2667** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
2668a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
2669
2670** Changes to garbage collection
2671
2672*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
2673of live and free strings.
2674
2675*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
2676strings that have been consed so far.
2677
a933dad1 2678\f
04545643
GM
2679* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
2680Lisp Manual
2681
f7eb32aa 2682+++
a299a6f0
GM
2683** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes
2684mini-windows.
2685
2686** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third argument, FULLY.
ea4c1b7c
MB
2687If FULLY is non-nil, then locations that are partially obscured aren't
2688considered visible.
2689
a299a6f0 2690** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used.
82a452c8 2691
9a8d84ca
DL
2692+++
2693** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2c69ced2
GM
2694
2695** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
2696image.
2697
2698- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
2699
2700Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
2701
2702SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
2703measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
2704character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
2705font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
2706FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
2707
ebb8f116
GM
2708** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image
2709has a mask bitmap.
2710
2711- Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME
2712
2713Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap.
2714FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil
2715or omitted means use the selected frame.
2716
f6499c03 2717+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
2718** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
2719satisfying one of a list of specifications.
2720
2721+++
2722** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
2723optional.
2724
f6499c03
DL
2725+++
2726** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see
2727below).
04545643
GM
2728
2729\f
a933dad1
DL
2730* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
2731
2732Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2733--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2734When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2735so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2736
f6d3257b
GM
2737** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
2738to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
2739
2740Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
2741text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
2742is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
2743your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
2744laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
2745just display it black instead.
2746
2747This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
2748a line like
2749
2750 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
2751
2752in your `.emacs'.
2753
a933dad1
DL
2754** New face implementation.
2755
2756Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
2757font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
2758
2759+++
2760*** New faces.
2761
2762Each face can specify the following display attributes:
2763
2764 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 2765
a933dad1
DL
2766 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
2767 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 2768
a933dad1 2769 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 2770
a933dad1 2771 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 2772
a933dad1 2773 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 2774
a933dad1 2775 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 2776
a933dad1
DL
2777 7. Background color.
2778
2779 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
2780
2781 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
2782
2783 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
2784
2785 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2786
2787 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2788 color.
2789
2790 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
2791 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
2792
2793Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
2794same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
2795frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
2796faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
2797with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
2798attributes mentioned above.
2799
2800There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
2801definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
2802created frames.
79214ddf 2803
a933dad1
DL
2804A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
2805have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
2806`fully-specified'.
2807
2808+++
2809*** Face merging.
2810
2811The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
2812combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
2813aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
2814properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
2815that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
2816results in a fully-specified face.
2817
2818+++
2819*** Face realization.
2820
2821After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
2822merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
2823realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
2824available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
2825face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
2826cache of the frame on which it was realized.
2827
2828Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
2829character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
2830for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
2831charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
2832
2833Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
2834specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
2835being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
2836the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
2837statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
2838
2839In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
2840`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
28410x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
2842the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
2843initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
2844Emacs.
2845
2846Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
2847`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
2848registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
2849with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
2850
a7c13351 2851+++
a933dad1
DL
2852**** Clearing face caches.
2853
2854The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
2855on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
2856unused fonts.
2857
2858+++
2859*** Font selection.
79214ddf 2860
a933dad1
DL
2861Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
2862given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
2863for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
2864
2865If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
2866pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
2867family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
2868property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
2869an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
2870
2871Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
2872against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
2873match for the given face attributes in this font list.
2874
2875Font selection can be influenced by the user.
2876
2877The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
2878attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
2879face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
2880names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
2881that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
2882width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
2883to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
2884
2885Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to
2886specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a
2887face doesn't exist.
2888
2889+++
2890**** Scalable fonts
2891
2892Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
2893since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
2894servers.
2895
2896To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 2897`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
2898scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
2899Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
2900scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
2901that list. Example:
2902
2903 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
2904
2905allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
2906
2907+++
2908*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
2909
2910- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
2911
2912Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
2913is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
2914string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
2915
2916If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
2917the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
2918FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
2919POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
2920SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
2921These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
2922if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
2923REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
2924the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
2925of the face font sort order.
2926
79214ddf 2927- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
2928
2929Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
2930omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
2931(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
2932non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
2933
2934- Variable: font-list-limit
2935
2936Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
2937won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
2938matching font. The default is currently 100.
2939
2940+++
2941*** Setting face attributes.
2942
2943For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
2944with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
2945implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
2946`face-attribute'.
2947
2948Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
2949symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
2950
2951The following attributes are recognized:
2952
2953`:family'
2954
2955VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
2956or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
2957and `?' are allowed.
2958
2959`:width'
2960
2961VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
2962It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
2963`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
2964`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
2965
2966`:height'
2967
787345ff
MB
2968VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use
2969in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to
2970scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old
2971height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height.
a933dad1
DL
2972
2973`:weight'
2974
2975VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
2976symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
2977`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
2978
2979`:slant'
2980
2981VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
2982symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
2983`reverse-oblique'.
2984
2985`:foreground', `:background'
2986
2987VALUE must be a color name, a string.
2988
2989`:underline'
2990
2991VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
2992VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
2993a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
2994don't underline.
2995
2996`:overline'
2997
2998VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
2999VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
3000string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
3001overline.
3002
3003`:strike-through'
3004
3005VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
3006striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
3007face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
3008is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
3009
3010`:box'
3011
3012VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
3013around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
3014VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
3015of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
3016and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
3017VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
3018:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
3019the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
3020specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
3021defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
3022the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
3023color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
3024should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
3025like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
3026that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
3027the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
3028box.
3029
3030`:inverse-video'
3031
3032VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
3033inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
3034
3035`:stipple'
3036
3037If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
3038The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
3039searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
3040HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
3041is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
3042explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
3043
3044For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
3045and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
3046
3047`:font'
3048
3049Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
3050XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
3051is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
3052versions of Emacs.
3053
3054For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
3055be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
3056must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
3057
3058Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
3059`defface'.
3060
787345ff
MB
3061`:inherit'
3062
3063VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list
3064of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face
3065like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces.
3066
a933dad1
DL
3067*** Face attributes and X resources
3068
3069The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
3070from X resources:
3071
3072 Face attribute X resource class
3073-----------------------------------------------------------------------
3074 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
3075 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
3076 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
3077 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
3078 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
3079 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
3080 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
3081 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
3082 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
3083 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
3084 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
3085 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
3086 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 3087 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
3088 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
3089 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3090 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
3091 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
3092 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3093
3094+++
3095*** Text property `face'.
3096
3097The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
3098specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
3099specification can be
3100
31011. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
3102
31032. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
3104 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
3105 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
3106 for face attribute names.
3107
31083. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
3109 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
3110 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
3111
3112+++
3113** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
3114
acf3ecb7
EZ
3115The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
3116on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
3117the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 3118default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 3119`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
3120used to clear the mapping table.
3121
acf3ecb7
EZ
3122** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
3123
3124The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
3125and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
3126type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
3127color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
3128display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
3129old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
3130`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
3131compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
3132should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
3133modify their color-related behavior.
3134
3135The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
3136any frame type.
3137
8a5719f0
EZ
3138** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
3139
3140The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
3141`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
3142`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
3143`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
3144`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
3145`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
3146display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
3147the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
3148platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
3149
a933dad1
DL
3150+++
3151** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 3152
463cac2d 3153This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
a933dad1
DL
3154
3155The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
3156end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
3157Otherwise, it returns zero.
3158
463cac2d
GM
3159** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
3160
3161There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
3162buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
59927f88 3163property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
463cac2d 3164
9a9dfda8 3165Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 3166forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 3167to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 3168not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
3169commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
3170boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
3171`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
3172functions.
463cac2d
GM
3173
3174Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 3175a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 3176editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 3177
9a9dfda8
GM
3178The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
3179
59927f88 3180- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9a9dfda8
GM
3181
3182Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
59927f88 3183
9a9dfda8
GM
3184A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3185If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
3186constrained position if that is is different.
3187
3188If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
3189positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
3190ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
59927f88 3191constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9a9dfda8
GM
3192as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3193is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
59927f88
MB
3194fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
3195the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
3196also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9a9dfda8
GM
3197
3198If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
3199NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
3200unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
3201C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
3202only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
3203
59927f88
MB
3204If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
3205a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
3206
3207Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
3208
3209- Function: delete-field &optional POS
9a9dfda8 3210
59927f88 3211Delete the field surrounding POS.
9a9dfda8 3212A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3213If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3214
3215- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3216
3217Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
3218A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3219If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3220If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9a9dfda8
GM
3221field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
3222
3223- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3224
3225Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
3226A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3227If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3228If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9a9dfda8
GM
3229then the end of the *following* field is returned.
3230
3231- Function: field-string &optional POS
3232
3233Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
3234A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3235If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3236
3237- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
3238
3239Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
3240A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3241If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8 3242
a933dad1
DL
3243+++
3244** Image support.
3245
3246Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
3247strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
3248(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
3249replaces the display of the characters having that property.
3250
3251If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
3252`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
3253AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
3254window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
3255area.
3256
3257IMAGE is an image specification.
3258
3259*** Image specifications
3260
3261Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
3262is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
3263specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
3264symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
3265described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
3266
3267The following is a list of properties all image types share.
3268
3269`:ascent ASCENT'
3270
576da55d
GM
3271ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
3272If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
5d94f558 3273to use for its ascent.
576da55d
GM
3274
3275If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
3276image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
3277
5d94f558 3278If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
04545643
GM
3279centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
3280of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
3281overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
3282
3283`:margin MARGIN'
3284
79214ddf 3285MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
3286margin around the image. Default is 0.
3287
3288`:relief RELIEF'
3289
3290RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
3291around an image.
3292
3293`:algorithm ALGO'
3294
47e351a3
GM
3295Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it.
3296
3297ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss''
3298edge-detection algorithm to the image.
3299
3300ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means
3301apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a
3302nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at
3303position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels
3304around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the
3305neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the
3306transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at
3307x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown
3308below.
3309
3310 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
3311 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
3312 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
3313
3314The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
3315resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
3316multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
3317of the factors' absolute values.
3318
327652be 3319Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
a933dad1 3320
47e351a3
GM
3321 (1 0 0
3322 0 0 0
3323 9 9 -1)
3324
3325Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
3326
3327 ( 2 -1 0
3328 -1 0 1
3329 0 1 -2)
3330
ba9eeda1
GM
3331ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks
3332``disabled''.
3333
47e351a3
GM
3334`:mask MASK'
3335
3336If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for
3337the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the
3338image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the
3339background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the
3340image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from the corners is
3341the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED
3342GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the
3343image.
a933dad1 3344
47e351a3
GM
3345If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images
3346in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying
3347`:mask nil'.
a933dad1
DL
3348
3349`:file FILE'
3350
3351Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
3352search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
3353building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
3354may be present in the image specification.
3355
518df5c4
GM
3356`:data DATA'
3357
3358Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
3359supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
3360present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
3361support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
3362
a933dad1
DL
3363*** Supported image types
3364
b246b1f6 3365**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
3366
3367XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
3368properties supported are
3369
3370`:foreground FG'
3371
3372FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3373is the frame's foreground.
3374
46c5af7f 3375`:background BG'
a933dad1
DL
3376
3377BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3378the frame's background color.
3379
3380XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
3381case, the image specification must contain the following properties
3382instead of a `:file' property.
3383
3384`:width WIDTH'
3385
3386WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
3387
3388`:height HEIGHT'
3389
3390HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
3391
3392`:data DATA'
3393
3394DATA must be either
3395
3396 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
3397 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
3398
3399 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
3400
3401 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
3402 bitmap.
3403
c76e04a8
GM
3404 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
3405 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
3406 in the file.
3407
a933dad1
DL
3408**** XPM, image type `xpm'
3409
3410XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
3411`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
3412found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
3413`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
3414
3415Additional image properties supported are:
3416
3417`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
3418
3419SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
3420name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
3421name.
3422
3423XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
3424add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
3425
a933dad1
DL
3426The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
3427to display compressed images.
3428
3429**** PBM, image type `pbm'
3430
3431PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2b8e9c91
GM
3432mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for
3433mono images are
3434
3435`:foreground FG'
3436
3437FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3438is the frame's foreground.
3439
3440`:background FG'
3441
3442BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3443the frame's background color.
a933dad1
DL
3444
3445**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
3446
3447Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
3448package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
3449are:
3450
a933dad1
DL
3451**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
3452
3453Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
3454package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3455properties defined.
3456
3457**** GIF, image type `gif'
3458
3459Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
3460`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
3461
3462Additional image properties supported are:
3463
3464`:index INDEX'
3465
3466INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
3467multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
3468
3469This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
3470For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
3471at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
3472every 0.1 seconds.
3473
3474(defun show-anim (file max)
3475 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
3476 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
3477
3478(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
3479 (when (= idx max)
3480 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 3481 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
3482 (save-excursion
3483 (set-buffer buffer)
3484 (goto-char (point-min))
3485 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
3486 (insert-image img "x"))
3487 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
3488
3489**** PNG, image type `png'
3490
3491Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
3492package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3493properties defined.
3494
3495**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
3496
3497Additional image properties supported are:
3498
3499`:pt-width WIDTH'
3500
3501WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 3502integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
3503
3504`:pt-height HEIGHT'
3505
3506HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 3507must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
3508
3509`:bounding-box BOX'
3510
3511BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
3512the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
3513files. This is an required property.
3514
3515Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
3516lisp/gs.el.
3517
3518*** Lisp interface.
3519
79214ddf
FP
3520The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
3521which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
3522
3523Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
3524they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
3525The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
3526manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
3527images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
3528
3529*** Simplified image API, image.el
3530
3531The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
3532creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
3533can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
3534define an image based on available image types. The functions
3535`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
3536buffer.
3537
3538+++
3539** Display margins.
3540
3541Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
3542and images.
3543
3544To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
3545`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
3546`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
3547obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
3548`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
3549the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
3550of the display margins.
3551
3552You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
3553containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
3554one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
3555string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
3556in this file).
3557
3558+++
3559** Help display
3560
3561Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
3562moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
3563`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
3564that have a `help-echo' property.
3565
9662da0b 3566If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
85a8aca9 3567is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
c20aeb83
GM
3568the window in which the help was found.
3569
3570If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
3571`help-echo' text property was found.
3572
3573If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
3574POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
3575
3576If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
5ed8d5af 3577the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
c20aeb83 3578mouse.
d5aa31d8 3579
9662da0b
GM
3580If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
3581string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
3582
3583For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
3584determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
3585property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
3586For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
3587used as help string.
a933dad1
DL
3588
3589The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
f0298744
DL
3590the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
3591causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
a933dad1
DL
3592
3593+++
3594** Vertical fractional scrolling.
3595
3596The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
3597This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
3598
3599The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
3600scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
3601The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
3602scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
3603used.
3604
79214ddf
FP
3605 (global-set-key [A-down]
3606 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 3607 (interactive)
79214ddf 3608 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 3609 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 3610 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
3611 #'(lambda ()
3612 (interactive)
79214ddf 3613 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
3614 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
3615
3616+++
3617** New hook `fontification-functions'.
3618
3619Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
3620when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
3621variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
3622is called with one argument, POS.
3623
3624At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
3625characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
3626as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
3627property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
3628`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
3629
3630+++
3631** Tool bar support.
3632
3633Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
3634parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
3635controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
3636suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
3637`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
3638automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
3639
3640*** Tool bar item definitions
3641
3642Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
3643`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
3644where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 3645
a933dad1
DL
3646CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
3647evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
3648the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
3649property (see below).
79214ddf 3650
a933dad1
DL
3651BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
3652binding are currently ignored.
3653
3654The following properties are recognized:
3655
3656`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 3657
a933dad1
DL
3658FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
3659or disabled.
79214ddf 3660
a933dad1 3661`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 3662
a933dad1 3663FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 3664
a933dad1
DL
3665`:filter FUNCTION'
3666
3667FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
3668FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
3669used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 3670
a933dad1
DL
3671`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
3672
3673TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
3674and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 3675
a933dad1
DL
3676`:image IMAGES'
3677
3678IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
3679image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
3680meaning of each of the four elements:
3681
3682 Index Use when item is
3683 ----------------------------------------
3684 0 enabled and selected
3685 1 enabled and deselected
3686 2 disabled and selected
3687 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 3688
4ba7246d
GM
3689If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
3690algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
3691
a933dad1 3692`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 3693
a933dad1
DL
3694Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
3695is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
3696
dab96841 3697The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding
d1e68bce
DL
3698toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used
3699to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the
3700menu bar.
dab96841 3701
a933dad1
DL
3702*** Tool-bar-related variables.
3703
3704If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
3705resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
3706than 1/4 of the frame's size.
3707
79214ddf 3708If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
3709raised when the mouse moves over them.
3710
3711You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
3712`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
3713pixels. Default is 1.
3714
3715You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
3716`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
3717
3718*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
3719
3720You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 3721a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
3722
3723 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
3724 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
3725 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
3726
3727is the original tool bar item definition, then
3728
3729 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
3730
3731makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
3732item.
3733
3734** Mode line changes.
3735
3736+++
3737*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
3738
3739The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
3740that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
3741a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
3742
37431. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
3744a `local-map' text property.
3745
37462. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
3747that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
3748
37493. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
3750is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
3751`local-map' property.
3752
3753The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
3754properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
3755example.
3756
54522c9f
GM
3757*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
3758evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
3759
a933dad1
DL
3760+++
3761*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
3762variable mode-line-format to nil.
3763
3764+++
3765*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
3766
3767This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
3768`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
3769completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
3770`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
3771line.
3772
3773The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
3774`header-line'.
3775
3776The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
3777position in the header-line.
3778
3779+++
3780** Text property `display'
3781
623a0aae
GM
3782The `display' text property is used to insert images into text,
3783replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is
3784also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of
3785the `display' property should be a display specification, as described
a933dad1
DL
3786below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
3787
623a0aae
GM
3788*** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas
3789
3790To replace the text having the `display' property with some other
3791text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'.
3792
3793If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left
3794marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in
3795the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING
3796is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
3797simpler form STRING as property value.
3798
a933dad1
DL
3799*** Variable width and height spaces
3800
3801To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
3802specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
3803`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
3804area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
3805marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
3806displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
3807simpler form STRETCH as property value.
3808
3809The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
3810PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
3811properties described below.
3812
3813The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
3814characters having the `display' property.
3815
3816- :width WIDTH
3817
3818Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
3819character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
3820
3821- :relative-width FACTOR
3822
3823Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
3824first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
3825same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
3826width of that character by FACTOR.
3827
3828- :align-to HPOS
3829
3830Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
3831value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
3832
3833Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
3834
3835- :height HEIGHT
3836
3837Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
3838normal line height.
3839
3840- :relative-height FACTOR
3841
3842The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
3843of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
3844
3845- :ascent ASCENT
3846
3847Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
3848used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
3849baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
3850equal to 100.
3851
3852You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
3853
3854*** Images
3855
3856A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
3857. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
3858in the display, the characters having this display specification in
3859their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
3860the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
3861`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
3862area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
3863the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
3864as display specification.
3865
3866*** Other display properties
3867
3868- :space-width FACTOR
3869
3870Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
3871should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
3872integer or float.
3873
3874- :height HEIGHT
3875
3876Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
3877
3878If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
3879means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
3880the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
3881``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
3882a font is available counts as a step.
3883
3884If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
3885as tall as the frame's default font.
3886
3887If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
3888height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
3889
3890Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
3891`height' bound to the current specified font height.
3892
3893- :raise FACTOR
3894
3895FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
3896font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
3897raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
3898amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
3899`:height' subproperty.
3900
3901*** Conditional display properties
3902
3903All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
3904has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
3905applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
3906During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
3907the text having the `display' property.
3908
3909The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
3910`(:when t SPEC)'.
3911
3912+++
3913** New menu separator types.
3914
3915Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
3916item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
3917treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
3918to specify other menu separator types.
3919
3920- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
3921
3922No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
3923separator occurs.
3924
3925- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
3926
3927A single line in the menu's foreground color.
3928
3929- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
3930
3931A double line in the menu's foreground color.
3932
3933- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
3934
3935A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3936
3937- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
3938
3939A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3940
3941- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
3942
3943A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
3944displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
3945
3946- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
3947
3948A single line with 3D raised appearance.
3949
3950- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
3951
3952A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
3953
3954- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
3955
3956A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
3957
3958- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
3959
3960Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3961
3962- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
3963
3964Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
3965
3966- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
3967
3968Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3969
3970- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
3971
3972Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
3973
3974Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
3975the corresponding single-line separators.
3976
3977+++
3978** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
3979
3980The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
3981`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
3982Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
3983that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
3984default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
3985default background is the background color of the frame, and the
3986default foreground is black.
3987
3988The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
3989(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
3990`ScrollBarBackground').
3991
3992Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
3993settings for scroll bar colors.
3994
3995+++
3996** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
3997display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
3998
3999---
4000** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
4001starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
4002on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
4003line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
4004the original window start.
4005
4006---
4007** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
4008`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
4009now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
4010
4011+++
4012** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
4013
4014A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
4015`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
4016windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
4017other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
4018
4019The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
4020fixed-width and fixed-height.
4021
4022 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
4023
4024A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
4025fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
4026window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
4027change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
4028temporarily to nil, for example
4029
4030 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
4031 (enlarge-window 10))
4032
79214ddf 4033Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 4034or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
4035
4036** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
4037terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
4038to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
4039overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
4040horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
4041support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050 4042
3787e12e
GM
4043
4044^L
4045* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
4046
4047** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
4048input.
4049
4050** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
4051
4052** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
4053
4054** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
4055only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
4056exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
4057(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
4058(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
4059
4060** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
4061been added.
4062
4063^L
4064* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
4065
4066** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
4067
4068^L
4069* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
4070
4071** Not new, but not mentioned before:
4072M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
4073\f
4074* Changes in Emacs 20.4
4075
4076** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
4077
4078You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
4079Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
4080`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
4081
4082If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
4083is the one that is used.
4084
4085** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
4086the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
4087Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
4088separate from the command's regular output.
4089Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
4090says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
4091In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
4092the buffer name.
4093
4094When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
4095output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
4096it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
4097cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
4098
4099** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
4100the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
4101is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
4102created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
4103
4104** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
4105example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
4106match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
4107quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
4108
4109** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
4110now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
4111if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
4112they never ignore case.
4113
4114** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
4115under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
4116applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
4117of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
4118just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
4119convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
4120part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
4121
4122If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
4123the same format that was used in the file before.
4124
4125You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
4126`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
4127
4128** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
4129renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
4130This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
4131
4132** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
4133The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
4134buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
4135your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
4136is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
4137end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
4138Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
4139
4140The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
4141eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
4142control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
4143format. You can now customize these variables.
4144
4145** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
4146filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
4147filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
4148enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
4149
4150** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
4151in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
4152windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
4153
4154** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
4155dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
4156doesn't have any effect.
4157
4158** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
4159not one per buffer.
4160
4161** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
4162use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
4163 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
4164
4165** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
4166To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
4167`auto-show-mode' command.
4168
4169** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
4170avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
4171versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
4172choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
4173occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
4174
4175** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
4176cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
4177
4178** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
4179character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
4180feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
4181
4182** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
4183the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
4184interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
4185and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
4186
4187** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
4188
4189The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
4190that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
4191one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
4192codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
4193set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
4194
4195Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
4196from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
4197
4198IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
4199equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
4200a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
4201`?' on other systems.
4202
4203IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
4204feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
4205Unix.
4206
4207Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
4208current codepage when it starts.
4209
4210** Mail changes
4211
4212*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
4213`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
4214appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
4215non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
4216MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
4217headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
4218latin-1:
4219
4220 MIME-version: 1.0
4221 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
4222 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
4223
4224*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
4225default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
4226default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
4227sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
4228buffer-file-coding-system.
4229
4230You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
4231sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
4232mail.
4233
4234*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
4235if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
4236Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
4237list of possible coding systems.
4238
4239** CC Mode changes
4240
4241*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
4242modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
4243longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
4244docstring for details.
4245
4246*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
4247symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
4248found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
4249prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
4250lineup functions use this feature currently.
4251
4252*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
4253"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
4254
4255*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
4256"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
4257
4258*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
4259from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
4260symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
4261c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
4262anonymous classes.
4263
4264*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
4265syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
4266
4267*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
4268inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
4269support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
4270function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
4271
4272*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
4273(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
4274brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
4275c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
4276(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
4277
4278*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
4279
4280*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
4281
4282*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
4283for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
4284
4285*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
4286
4287*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
4288associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
4289This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
4290circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
4291class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
4292
4293** Gnus changes.
4294
4295*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
4296added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
4297Gnus manual for the full story.
4298
4299*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
4300before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
4301group, which is created automatically.
4302
4303*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
4304values.
4305
4306*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
4307
4308*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
4309outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
4310
4311*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
4312`C-u C-c C-c'.
4313
4314*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
4315
4316*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
4317re-highlighting of the article buffer.
4318
4319*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
4320
4321*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
4322Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
4323
4324*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
4325`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
4326
4327*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
4328control over simplification.
4329
4330*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
4331
4332*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
4333limit.
4334
4335*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
4336
4337*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
4338
4339*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
4340If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
4341rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
4342
4343*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
4344`a' forces normal posting method.
4345
4346*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
4347-- `W d'.
4348
4349*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
4350to a non-nil value.
4351
4352*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
4353where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
4354
4355*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
4356has been added.
4357
4358*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
4359
4360*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
4361
4362*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
4363`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
4364
4365*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
4366`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
4367
4368*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
4369
4370*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
4371been added.
4372
4373*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
4374`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
4375
4376*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
4377updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
4378
4379*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
4380
4381*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
4382
4383*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
4384
4385** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
4386
4387*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
4388options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
4389nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
4390
4391*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
4392TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
4393of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
4394TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
4395can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
4396
4397*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
4398All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
4399but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
4400the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
4401
4402*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
4403the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
4404buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
4405mismatch.
4406
4407** Changes to RefTeX mode
4408
4409*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
4410file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
4411
4412*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
4413lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
4414characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
4415removed from the label.
4416
4417*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
4418a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
4419
4420*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
4421customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
4422
4423*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
4424`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
4425expressions.
4426
4427*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
4428
4429** New/deleted modes and packages
4430
4431*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
4432SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
4433
4434*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
4435editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
4436SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
4437
4438*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
4439changes with a special face.
4440
4441*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
4442this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
4443Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
4444\f
4445* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
4446
4447** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
4448This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
4449conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
4450and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
4451check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
4452
4453The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
4454Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
4455distribution when the config.bat script is run.
4456
4457** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
4458MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
4459controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
4460directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
4461Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
4462on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
4463string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
4464program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
4465printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
4466
4467** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
4468output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
4469available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
4470input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
4471temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
4472program.
4473
4474An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
4475and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
4476programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
4477automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
4478as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
4479ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
4480
4481** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
4482a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
4483MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
4484was not documented clearly before.
4485
4486** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
4487This includes Tetris and Snake.
4488\f
4489* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
4490
4491** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
4492return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
4493They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
4494meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
4495
4496** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
4497WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
4498and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
4499
4500** Changes in the file-attributes function.
4501
4502*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
4503It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
4504
4505*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
4506the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
4507integers.
4508
4509** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
4510files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
4511arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
4512file names and attributes are returned.
4513
4514** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
4515sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
4516accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
4517It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
4518returns the result.
4519
4520** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
4521to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
4522
4523** New functions for base64 conversion:
4524
4525The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
4526into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
4527performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
4528optionally.
4529
4530Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
4531job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
4532
4533**
4534The new function process-running-child-p
4535will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
4536terminal to its own child process.
4537
4538** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
4539when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
4540to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
4541itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
4542
4543** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
4544be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
4545
4546** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
4547:included is an alias for :visible.
4548
4549easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
4550easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
4551to move or copy menu entries.
4552
4553** Multibyte editing changes
4554
4555*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
4556an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
4557make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
4558work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
4559char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
4560 (setq char (sref str idx)
4561 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
4562The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
4563
4564If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
4565(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
4566 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
4567
4568*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
4569region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
4570deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
4571
4572 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
4573
4574This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
4575across the boundary.
4576
4577*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
4578`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
4579 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
4580 contains 8-bit characters.
4581 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
4582 contains invalid characters.
4583
4584*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
4585text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
4586preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
4587text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
4588way.
4589
4590*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
4591If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
4592end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
4593prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
4594
4595*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
4596compose Thai characters in a string.
4597
4598** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
4599argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
4600for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
4601menus should always use the third argument.
4602
4603** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
4604read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
4605arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
4606input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
4607
4608** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
4609of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
4610programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
4611inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
4612
4613** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
4614the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
4615returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
4616echo area contents.
4617
4618 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
4619
4620** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
4621NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
4622requested feature cannot be loaded.
4623
4624** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
4625foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
4626means to clear out that attribute.
4627
4628** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
4629gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
4630
4631** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
4632read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
4633unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
4634end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
4635
4636** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
4637the gap of the current buffer.
4638
4639** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
4640to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
4641current buffer.
4642
4643** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
4644facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
4645These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
4646it back in after any modifications have been made.
4647\f
4648* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
4649
4650** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
4651the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
4652/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
4653directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
4654subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
4655
4656Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
4657names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
4658Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
4659which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
4660these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
4661
4662Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
4663starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
4664time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
4665
4666This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
4667Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
4668to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
4669subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
4670`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
4671results.
4672
4673** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
4674GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
4675that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
4676fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
4677\f
4678* Changes in Emacs 20.3
4679
4680** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
4681including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
4682it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
4683perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
4684
4685** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
4686specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
4687region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
4688further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
4689command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
4690within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
4691are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
4692region.
4693
4694In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
4695selective undo.
4696
4697** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
4698unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
4699buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
4700effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
4701Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
4702
4703The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
4704though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
4705-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
4706load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
4707
4708** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
4709no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
4710enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
4711something that most users not do.
4712
4713** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
4714operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
4715The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
4716applications.
4717
4718C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
4719pasting operations.
4720
4721** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
4722setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
4723like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
4724printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
4725`ps-printer-name'.
4726
4727** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
4728minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
4729any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
4730except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
4731incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
4732hits a new word.
4733
4734Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
4735Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
4736to be confused by TeX commands.
4737
4738You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
4739correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
4740clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
4741of various alternative replacements and actions.
4742
4743Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
4744the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
4745corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
4746alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
4747flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
4748
4749Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
4750flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
4751
4752** Changes in input method usage.
4753
4754Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
4755the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
4756respectively.
4757
4758You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
4759
4760If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
4761of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
4762
4763The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
4764that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
4765
4766 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
4767
4768 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
4769
4770 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
4771 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
4772
4773 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
4774 given in the following case:
4775 o When you are using a complex input method.
4776 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
4777
4778If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
4779input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
4780and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
4781setting it to t is helpful.
4782
4783The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
4784
4785In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
4786keys:
4787 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
4788 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
4789 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
4790These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
4791environment.
4792
4793** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
4794names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
4795minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
4796get
4797
4798 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
4799
4800which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
4801
4802Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
4803Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
4804
4805** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
4806at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
4807its owner and group.
4808
4809** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
4810Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
4811
4812** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
4813contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
4814
4815** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
4816which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
4817in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
4818by the left edge of the rectangle.
4819
4820** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
4821increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
4822C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
4823for writing keyboard macros.
4824
4825** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
4826files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
4827frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
4828the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
4829additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
4830info.
4831
4832** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
4833
4834** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
4835query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
4836contents only.
4837
4838** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
4839confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
4840the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
4841says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
4842
4843** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
4844non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
4845literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
4846
4847** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
4848now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
4849Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
4850inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
4851
4852** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
4853failure if the command produces no output.
4854
4855** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
4856manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
4857the mouse.
4858
4859** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
4860mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
4861function and variable names.
4862
4863** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
4864reading specific files. This has higher priority than
4865file-coding-system-alist.
4866
4867** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
4868t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
4869converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
4870the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
4871according to the current fontset.
4872
4873** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
4874
4875The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
4876that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
4877nonascii-insert-offset.
4878
4879For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
4880enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
4881nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
4882characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
4883
4884** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
4885an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
4886
4887** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
4888letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
4889
4890** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
4891are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
4892command keys.
4893
4894** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
4895user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
4896
4897Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
4898user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
4899all variables that have documentation.
4900
4901** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
4902shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
4903that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
4904minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
4905it should show; the default is 20.
4906
4907Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
4908the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
4909of your input.
4910
4911** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
4912all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
4913recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
4914argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
4915the customizable options which were changed since that version.
4916Newly added options are included as well.
4917
4918If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
4919then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
4920for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
4921
4922This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
4923Customize menu.
4924
4925** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
4926the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
4927
4928** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
4929buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
4930invoked.
4931
4932** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
4933that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
4934The default is 1.
4935
4936** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
4937syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
4938new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
4939(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
4940sensibly.
4941
4942** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
4943
4944** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
4945value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
4946two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
4947
4948** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
4949reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
4950for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
4951every night.
4952
4953** Desktop changes
4954
4955*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
4956the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
4957
4958*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
4959and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
4960
4961** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
4962read and post multi-lingual articles.
4963
4964** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
4965doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
4966be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
4967outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
4968the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
4969made invisible again.
4970
4971** Mail reading and sending changes
4972
4973*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
4974the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
4975changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
4976toggle.
4977
4978*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
4979now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
4980summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
4981the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
4982rmail-default-body-file.
4983
4984*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
4985longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
4986handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
4987
4988*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
4989it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
4990is evaluated to insert the signature.
4991
4992*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
4993outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
4994handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
4995putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
4996transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
4997especially interested in trying feedmail.
4998
4999feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
5000feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
5001provided by feedmail are:
5002
5003**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
5004stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
5005there is also a queue for draft messages
5006
5007**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
5008be prompted for confirmation
5009
5010**** does smart filling of address headers
5011
5012**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
5013the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
5014can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
5015
5016**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
5017the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
5018/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
5019function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
5020
5021** Dired changes
5022
5023*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
5024files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
5025
5026*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
5027run Dired on the directory name at point.
5028
5029*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
5030files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
5031for a specified regexp.
5032
5033** VC Changes
5034
5035*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
5036conveniently.
5037
5038*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
5039faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
5040Dired.
5041
5042VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
5043directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
5044listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
5045currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
5046
5047You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
5048then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
5049vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
5050control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
5051on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
5052
5053All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
5054is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
5055`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
5056the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
5057`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
5058
5059The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
5060toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
5061VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
5062`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
5063
5064Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
5065ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
5066command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
5067
5068*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
5069file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
5070session to resolve them.
5071
5072Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
5073resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
5074contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
5075uses as well).
5076
5077*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
5078command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
5079you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
5080either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
5081branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
5082If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
5083using ediff.
5084
5085** Changes in Font Lock
5086
5087*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
5088are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
5089use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
5090unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
5091compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
5092
5093** Frame name display changes
5094
5095*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
5096frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
5097raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
5098when many frames are invisible or iconified.
5099
5100*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
5101frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
5102menu.
5103
5104** Comint (subshell) changes
5105
5106*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
5107subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
5108with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
5109
5110*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
5111
5112C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
5113that is, the line after the last line you got.
5114You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
5115
5116C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
5117send the current line together with the following line, when you send
5118the following line.
5119
5120C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
5121which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
5122previously sent input.
5123
5124C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
5125it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
5126as the search string.
5127
5128*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
5129automatically in compilation-mode windows.
5130
5131** C mode changes
5132
5133*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
5134and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
5135assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
5136definition.
5137
5138*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
5139(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
5140Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
5141style is still the default however.
5142
5143*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
5144
5145*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
5146are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
5147them. They do not have key bindings by default.
5148
5149*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
5150and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
5151
5152*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
5153namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
5154
5155*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
5156makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
5157
5158*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
5159c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
5160
5161*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
5162should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
5163package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
5164variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
5165
5166** Changes to hippie-expand.
5167
5168*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
5169non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
5170which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
5171
5172*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
5173non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
5174expanding dynamically.
5175
5176*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
5177non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
5178
5179*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
5180non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
5181this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
5182expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
5183
5184*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
5185
5186** Changes in BibTeX mode.
5187
5188*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
5189bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
5190automatic key generation. This replaces variable
5191bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
5192against the first word in the title.
5193
5194*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
5195capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
5196bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
5197lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
5198lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
5199bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
5200
5201*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
5202generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
5203replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
5204bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
5205
5206** Changes in vcursor.el.
5207
5208*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
5209and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
5210variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
5211entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
5212`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
5213in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
5214
5215*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
5216Editing group once the package is loaded.
5217
5218*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
5219generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
5220vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
5221
5222*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
5223vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
5224
5225** Ispell changes.
5226
5227*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
5228buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
5229are identified by syntax tables in effect.
5230
5231*** Generic region skipping implemented.
5232A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
5233and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
5234defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
5235include:
5236
5237 o URLs are automatically skipped
5238 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
5239
5240*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
5241
5242** Changes to RefTeX mode
5243
5244RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
5245large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
5246re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
5247section `Optimizations' in the manual.
5248
5249*** New recursive parser.
5250
5251The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
5252entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
5253recursive parser scans the individual files.
5254
5255*** Parsing only part of a document.
5256
5257Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
5258partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
5259the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
5260
5261 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
5262
5263*** Storing parsing information in a file.
5264
5265This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
5266
5267 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
5268
5269*** Using multiple selection buffers
5270
5271If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
5272for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
5273
5274 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
5275
5276*** References to external documents.
5277
5278The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
5279documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
5280documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
5281macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
5282RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
5283the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
5284The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
5285
5286*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
5287
5288The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
5289and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
5290
5291Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
5292the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
5293
5294*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
5295
5296The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
5297buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
5298
5299*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
5300
5301The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
5302contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
5303`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
5304have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
5305enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
5306at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
5307more.
5308
5309*** Support for the varioref package
5310
5311The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
5312
5313*** New hooks
5314
5315Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
5316and citations are created. These hooks are
5317`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
5318`reftex-format-cite-function'.
5319
5320*** Citations outside LaTeX
5321
5322The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
5323a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
5324
5325*** Short context is no longer fontified.
5326
5327The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
5328fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
5329fontified, use
5330
5331 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
5332
5333** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
5334With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
5335the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
5336directories that contain the same file name.
5337
5338Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
5339Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
5340file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
5341Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
5342have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
5343names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
5344directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
5345directory.
5346
5347** New modes and packages
5348
5349*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
5350It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
5351it, but some do not.
5352
5353*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
5354code.
5355
5356*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
5357current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
5358around in a buffer.
5359
5360Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
5361
5362*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
5363uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
5364be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
5365established system of notation similar to Chess.
5366
5367*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
5368documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
5369guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
5370
5371*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
5372available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
5373system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
5374simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
5375functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
5376the like.
5377
5378*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
5379identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
5380
5381*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
5382within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
5383used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
5384the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
5385
5386*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
5387
5388 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
5389 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
5390 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
5391 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
5392 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
5393 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
5394 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
5395 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
5396 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
5397 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
5398 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
5399
5400 Platform-specific modes:
5401
5402 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
5403 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
5404 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
5405 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
5406 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
5407 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
5408 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
5409 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
5410 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
5411\f
5412* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5413
5414** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
5415use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
5416That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
5417Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
5418
5419Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
5420you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
5421consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
5422
5423** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
5424and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
5425specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
5426searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
5427
5428** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
5429multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
5430character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
5431environment.
5432
5433** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
5434take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
5435string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
5436current input method for reading this one event.
5437
5438** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
5439now control whether to output certain characters as
5440backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
5441non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
5442characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
5443in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
5444\f
5445* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5446
5447** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
5448of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
5449
5450** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
5451in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
5452always increases point by 1.
5453
5454The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
5455considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
5456
5457See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
5458
5459** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
5460Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
5461default value changed. For example,
5462
5463 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
5464 :type 'integer
5465 :group 'foo
5466 :version "20.3")
5467
5468 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
5469 :version "20.3")
5470
5471If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
5472default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
5473is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
5474`:version' in the top level group.
5475
5476This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
5477
5478** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
5479starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
5480
5481However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
5482symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
5483support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
5484to themselves.
5485
5486If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
5487this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
5488values whatever.
5489
5490** There is a new debugger command, R.
5491It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
5492in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
5493
5494** Frame-local variables.
5495
5496You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
5497the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
5498local bindings for that variable.
5499
5500These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
5501frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
5502modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
5503parameter name.
5504
5505Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
5506Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
5507active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
5508that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
5509
5510It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
5511clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
5512very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
5513through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
5514
5515** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
5516"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
5517evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
5518makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
5519See the documentation in sregex.el.
5520
5521** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
5522is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
5523parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
5524The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
5525
5526** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
5527If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
5528
5529** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
5530known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
5531define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
5532
5533** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
5534when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
5535it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
5536history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
5537
5538The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
5539return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
5540empty input.
5541
5542** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
5543for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
5544`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
5545Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
5546`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
5547
5548** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
5549echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
5550a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
5551default password to use if the user enters nothing.
5552
5553** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
5554specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
5555function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
5556place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
5557non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
5558
5559** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
5560If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
5561up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
5562end of the window, even if this requires computation.
5563
5564** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
5565which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
5566If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
5567
5568** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
5569holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
5570was directed to display this buffer.
5571
5572** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
5573with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
5574describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
5575other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
5576set-window-configuration.
5577
5578** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
5579window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
5580positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
5581windows and the choice of buffers to display.
5582
5583** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
5584override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
5585look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
5586
5587If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
5588non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
5589map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
5590
5591minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
5592and it is meant to be set by major modes.
5593
5594** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
5595except that it discards all text properties from the result.
5596
5597** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
5598USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
5599floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
5600
5601** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
5602to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
5603in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
5604it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
5605
5606** Menu changes
5607
5608*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
5609keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
5610better supported.
5611
5612The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
5613a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
5614you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
5615can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
5616then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
5617
5618*** A new format for menu items is supported.
5619
5620In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
5621 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
5622defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
5623starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
5624
5625The format is:
5626 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
5627 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
5628where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
5629string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
5630The supported properties include
5631
5632:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5633 item is enabled.
5634:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5635 item should appear in the menu.
5636:filter FILTER-FN
5637 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
5638 which will be REAL-BINDING.
5639 It should return a binding to use instead.
5640:keys DESCRIPTION
5641 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
5642 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
5643 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
5644:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
5645 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
5646 keyboard binding.
5647:key-sequence nil
5648 This means that the command normally has no
5649 keyboard equivalent.
5650:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
5651:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
5652 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
5653 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
5654 value says whether this button is currently selected.
5655
5656Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
5657Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
5658
5659(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
5660
5661** New event types
5662
5663*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
5664mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
5665corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
5666which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
5667
5668 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
5669
5670where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5671same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
5672indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
5673negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
5674the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
5675forward, away from the user.
5676
5677As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5678
5679*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
5680files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
5681and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
5682filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
5683loaded into Emacs. The format is:
5684
5685 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
5686
5687where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5688same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
5689that were dragged and dropped.
5690
5691As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5692
5693** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
5694
5695*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
5696any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
5697to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
5698
5699*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
5700can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
5701that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
5702
5703*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
5704in Emacs 19 and before.
5705
5706The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
5707The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
5708
5709*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
5710buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
5711unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
5712representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
5713
5714This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
5715as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
5716viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
5717one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
5718will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
5719
5720This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
5721representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
5722(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
5723consistent with the new representation.
5724
5725*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
5726representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
5727about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
5728however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5729
5730The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
5731nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
5732using the table nonascii-translation-table.
5733
5734*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
5735representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
5736representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5737
5738The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
5739loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
5740is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
5741
5742*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5743which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
5744
5745*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5746which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
5747
5748*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
5749portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
5750so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
5751You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
5752
5753*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
5754it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
5755
5756*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
5757convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
5758buffer or string being searched.
5759
5760One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
5761[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
5762searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
5763searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
5764obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
5765you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
5766expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
5767
5768*** Structure of coding system changed.
5769
5770All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
5771by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
5772which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
5773as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
5774vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
5775your own alias name of a coding system by the function
5776define-coding-system-alias.
5777
5778The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
5779the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
5780access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
5781pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
5782character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
5783safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
5784'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
5785`iso-8859-1'.
5786
5787Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
5788The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
5789coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
5790(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
5791
5792Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
5793also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
5794are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
5795the other character sets and read it back correctly.
5796
5797*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
5798proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
5799This function requires a user interaction.
5800
5801*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
5802find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
5803select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
5804systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
5805a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
5806select-safe-coding-system.
5807
5808*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
5809decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
5810last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
5811was done.
5812
5813*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
5814used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
5815coding systems used by some specific language environment.
5816
5817*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
5818return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
5819characters are found, they now return a list of single element
5820`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
5821
5822*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
5823coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
5824coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
5825converted.
5826
5827*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
5828coding system for communicating with other X clients.
5829
5830*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
5831character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
5832character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
5833each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
5834either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
5835range of characters.
5836
5837*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
5838Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
5839
5840*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
5841in the current buffer at position POS.
5842
5843*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
5844input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
5845function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
5846character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
5847event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
5848binding input-method-function to nil.
5849
5850The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
5851method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
5852input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
5853the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
5854not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
5855
5856The input method function is not called when reading the second and
5857subsequent events of a key sequence.
5858
5859*** You can customize any language environment by using
5860set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
5861
5862The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
5863customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
5864instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
5865environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
5866exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
5867\f
5868* Changes in Emacs 20.1
5869
5870** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
5871options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
5872at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
5873tree structure.
5874
5875M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
5876user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
5877
5878With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
5879session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
5880in your .emacs file.)
5881
5882** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
5883You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
5884
5885** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
5886This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
5887
5888** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
5889immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
5890kills the region.
5891
5892The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
5893delete the character before point, as usual.
5894
5895** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
5896on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
5897by setting search-highlight to nil.)
5898
5899** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
5900insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
5901the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
5902onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
5903history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
5904past.)
5905
5906** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
5907This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
5908in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
5909TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
5910makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
5911
5912As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
5913and is an alias for it.
5914
5915If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
5916use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
5917
5918** Scrolling changes
5919
5920*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
5921position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
5922
5923In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
5924on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
5925where it started.
5926
5927*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
5928move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
5929screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
5930does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
5931
5932*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
5933top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
5934comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
5935recenters the window.
5936
5937** International character set support (MULE)
5938
5939Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
5940including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
5941Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
5942Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
5943features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
5944MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
5945
5946Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
5947coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
5948character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
5949variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
5950into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
5951
5952Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
5953generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
5954supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
5955language, to make it possible to type them.
5956
5957The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
5958character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
5959
5960The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
5961to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
5962
5963You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
5964
5965 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
5966
5967Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
5968characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
5969argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
5970already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
5971characters for their work until they want to change.
5972
5973*** Input methods
5974
5975An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
5976specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
5977has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
5978the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
5979support several input methods.
5980
5981The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
5982another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
5983work.
5984
5985A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
5986characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
5987composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
5988consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
5989sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
5990letter.
5991
5992The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
5993by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
5994First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
5995marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
5996mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
5997
5998None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
5999they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
6000phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
6001converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
6002
6003Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
6004word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
6005typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
6006the first guess is wrong.
6007
6008*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
6009turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
6010
6011If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
6012byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
6013they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
6014the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
6015
6016However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
6017use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
6018includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
6019translate automatically to and from either one.
6020
6021*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
6022
6023Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
6024file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
6025sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
6026what you want.
6027
6028If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
6029example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
6030system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
6031multibyte characters in that buffer.
6032
6033If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
6034character conversion as well.
6035
6036*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
6037
6038A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
6039Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
6040requires using many fonts.
6041
6042Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
6043collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
6044
6045A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
6046the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
6047have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
6048you would use a font.
6049
6050If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
6051specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
6052display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
6053
6054The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
6055(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
6056characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
6057or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
6058and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
6059
6060*** Defining fontsets.
6061
6062Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
6063chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
6064with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
6065
6066Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
6067of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
6068`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
6069standard fontset are created automatically.
6070
6071If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
6072argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
6073FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
6074with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
6075name is `fontset-startup'.
6076
6077Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
6078The resource value should have this form:
6079 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
6080FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
6081 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
6082 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
6083 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
6084The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
6085of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
6086CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
6087FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
6088
6089Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
6090last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
6091You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
6092
6093For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
6094font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
6095following resource,
6096 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
6097the font for ASCII is generated as below:
6098 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
6099Here is the substitution rule:
6100 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
6101 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
6102 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
6103 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
6104 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
6105
6106The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
6107fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
6108that function explicitly to create a fontset.
6109
6110With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
6111like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
6112name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
6113fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
6114fontsets.
6115
6116*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
6117defaults for a particular choice of language.
6118
6119Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
6120method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
6121visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
6122already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
6123language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
6124system for new files that you create.
6125
6126It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
6127set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
6128whole Emacs session.
6129
6130For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
6131chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
6132with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
6133
6134*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
6135specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
6136specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
6137the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
6138coding systems that Emacs supports.
6139
6140*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
6141lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
6142This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
6143After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
6144is used for *the immediately following command*.
6145
6146So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
6147write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
6148
6149If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
6150then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
6151
6152For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
6153visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
6154
6155*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
6156construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
6157to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
6158specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
6159of the file.
6160
6161*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
6162the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
6163code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
6164translated into that character code.
6165
6166This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
6167various countries to support the languages of those countries.
6168
6169By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
6170
6171*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
6172the coding system for keyboard input.
6173
6174Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
6175with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
6176some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
6177
6178By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
6179
6180Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
6181input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
6182translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
6183to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
6184designed to work with terminals.
6185
6186*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
6187specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
6188This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
6189has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
6190translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
6191in the corresponding buffer.
6192
6193By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
6194
6195*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
6196to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
6197It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
6198
6199*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
6200an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
6201command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
6202want to use.
6203
6204C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
6205method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
6206
6207*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
6208layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
6209remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
6210which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
6211
6212*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
6213the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
6214related information.
6215
6216*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
6217HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
6218scripts.
6219
6220*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
6221information about the support for a particular language.
6222You specify the language as an argument.
6223
6224*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
6225the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
6226first dash.
6227
6228A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
6229(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
6230whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
62311 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
6232
6233 A alternativnyj (Russian)
6234 B big5 (Chinese)
6235 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
6236 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
6237 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
6238 E euc-japan (Japanese)
6239 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6240 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
6241 K euc-korea (Korean)
6242 R koi8 (Russian)
6243 Q tibetan
6244 S shift_jis (Japanese)
6245 T lao
6246 T tis620 (Thai)
6247 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
6248 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6249 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
6250 v viqr (Vietnamese)
6251 z hz (Chinese)
6252
6253When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
6254two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
6255coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
6256keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
6257
6258*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
6259conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
6260
6261When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
6262into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
6263rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
6264Rmail files themselves.
6265
6266*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
6267conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
6268
6269Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
6270for sending mail:
6271
6272- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
6273- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
6274- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
6275 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
6276- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
6277
6278*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
6279to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
6280Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
6281translations.
6282
6283** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
6284of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
6285insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
6286without any conversion.
6287
6288** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
6289You can now specify any number of octal digits.
6290RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
6291any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
6292
6293** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
6294functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
6295
6296Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
6297Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
6298
6299Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
6300mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
6301
6302** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
6303complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
6304in the buffer before point.
6305
6306With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
6307symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
6308you are using.
6309
6310With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
6311just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
6312
6313** File locking works with NFS now.
6314
6315The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
6316in the same directory as FILENAME.
6317
6318This means that collision detection between two different machines now
6319works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
6320can become a bottleneck.
6321
6322The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
6323does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
6324create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
6325file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
6326rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
6327so useful that the change is worth while.
6328
6329When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
6330are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
6331collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
6332tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
6333
6334** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
6335it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
6336show-paren-mode.
6337
6338** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
6339selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
6340delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
6341
6342** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
6343within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
6344complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
6345
6346** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
6347it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
6348set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
6349
6350** Changes in View mode.
6351
6352*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
6353Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
6354
6355*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
6356view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
6357
6358*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
6359previous state.
6360
6361*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
6362scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
6363
6364*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
6365non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
6366not just the selected window.
6367
6368*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
6369read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
6370turns View mode on or off.
6371
6372*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
6373how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
6374delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
6375
6376** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
6377now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
6378
6379** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
6380has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
6381presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
6382which version to compare with.
6383
6384** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
6385blocks if a match is inside the block.
6386
6387The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
6388is outside the block. By customizing the variable
6389isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
6390shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
6391
6392By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
6393of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
6394blocks, all of them or none.
6395
6396** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
6397current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
6398confirmation first.
6399
6400** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
6401now changes the major mode according to that file name.
6402However, the mode will not be changed if
6403(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
6404(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
6405 not suitable for ordinary files, or
6406(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
6407
6408This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
6409
6410However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
6411these commands do not change the major mode.
6412
6413** M-x occur changes.
6414
6415*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
6416it performs a case-sensitive search.
6417
6418*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
6419if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
6420using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
6421
6422** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
6423in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
6424window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
6425that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
6426buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
6427
6428** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
6429after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
6430appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
6431come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
6432
6433** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
6434selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
6435buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
6436
6437** Outline mode changes.
6438
6439*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
6440
6441*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
6442
6443** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
6444you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
6445Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
6446was already active.
6447
6448The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
6449unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
6450get confused by it.
6451
6452If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
6453set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
6454
6455** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
6456
6457*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
6458conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
6459character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
6460including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
6461
6462The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
6463mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
6464copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
6465
6466*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
6467are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
6468values.
6469
6470`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
6471case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
6472`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
6473case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
6474
6475** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
6476certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
6477can be. The default value is 30.
6478
6479** Changes in Mail mode.
6480
6481*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
6482Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
6483composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
6484`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
6485`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
6486behavior.
6487
6488C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
6489compose-mail-other-frame.
6490
6491*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
6492the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
6493replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
6494buffer that shows the original message.
6495
6496*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
6497with separator lines around the contents.
6498
6499*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
6500in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
6501definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
6502need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
6503
6504*** New features in the mail-complete command.
6505
6506**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
6507for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
6508controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
6509Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
6510
6511**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
6512to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
6513/etc/passwd.
6514
6515**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
6516to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
6517/etc/passwd.
6518
6519** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
6520special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
6521directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
6522reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
6523
6524Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
6525when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
6526be taken to be magic.
6527
6528** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
6529files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
6530available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
6531
6532M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
6533(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
6534
6535** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
6536suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
6537
6538In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
6539
6540new key dired.el binding old key
6541------- ---------------- -------
6542 * c dired-change-marks c
6543 * m dired-mark m
6544 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
6545 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
6546 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
6547 * u dired-unmark u
6548 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
6549 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
6550 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
6551 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
6552 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
6553 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
6554
6555** Rmail changes.
6556
6557*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
6558saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
6559chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
6560each time you run it.
6561
6562*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
6563whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
6564
6565*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
6566messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
6567means to move in the opposite direction.
6568
6569*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
6570you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
6571
6572*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
6573just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
6574It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
6575can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
6576for output.
6577
6578** Gnus changes.
6579
6580*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
6581
6582*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
6583Gnus.
6584
6585*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
6586`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
6587
6588*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
6589article mode line.
6590
6591*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
6592
6593*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
6594
6595(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
6596
6597*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
6598are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
6599`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
6600
6601*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
6602
6603*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
6604
6605*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
6606See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
6607
6608*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
6609Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
6610used to pick articles.
6611
6612*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
6613another have been added.
6614
6615 `M-x gnus-change-server'
6616
6617*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
6618generating lines in buffers.
6619
6620*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
6621`M-C-_'.
6622
6623*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
6624
6625*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
6626
6627 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
6628
6629*** Scores can be decayed.
6630
6631 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
6632
6633*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
6634Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
6635
6636*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
6637the native server.
6638
6639 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
6640
6641*** A new command for reading collections of documents
6642(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
6643
6644*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
6645
6646*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
6647even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
6648
6649*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
6650(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
6651
6652 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
6653 a group.
6654
6655*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
6656sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
6657
6658 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
6659
6660*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
6661
6662 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
6663
6664*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
6665
6666 Use the `Y c' command.
6667
6668*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
6669
6670*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
6671
6672 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
6673
6674*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
6675from incoming mail before saving the mail.
6676
6677 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
6678
6679*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
6680
6681*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
6682the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
6683
6684 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
6685
6686Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
6687and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
6688from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
6689hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
6690this issue.)
6691
6692Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
6693automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
6694particular news group. This can be done by:
6695
6696 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
6697
6698Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
6699of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
6700"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
6701system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
6702for reading and posting).
6703
6704CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
6705 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
6706Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
6707newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
6708there.
6709
6710Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
6711default. Here are some of these default settings:
6712
6713 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
6714 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
6715 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
6716 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
6717 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
6718
6719When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
6720the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
6721
6722** CC mode changes.
6723
6724*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
6725code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
6726values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
6727this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
6728Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
6729loaded.
6730
6731If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
6732Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
6733style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
6734share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
6735c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
6736must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
6737
6738*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
6739of the current buffer.
6740
6741*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
6742it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
6743of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
6744
6745*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
6746style that the Python developers like.
6747
6748*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
6749This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
6750just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
6751
6752** VC Changes [new]
6753
6754** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
6755name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
6756directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
6757
6758This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
6759master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
6760developers.
6761
6762You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
6763RET in a buffer visiting that file.
6764
6765*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
6766other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
6767writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
6768calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
6769
6770*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
6771version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
6772
6773** Calendar changes.
6774
6775A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
6776of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
6777for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
6778
6779** ps-print changes
6780
6781There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
6782
6783*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
6784
6785The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
6786formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
6787`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
6788`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
6789It defaults to `letter'.
6790If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
6791
6792The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
6793of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
6794non-nil means "landscape" mode.
6795
6796The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
6797It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
6798It defaults to 1.
6799
6800*** Horizontal layout
6801
6802The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
6803`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
6804All are measured in points.
6805
6806*** Vertical layout
6807
6808The vertical layout is determined by the variables
6809`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
6810All are measured in points.
6811
6812*** Headers
6813
6814If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
6815`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
6816margin above the text.
6817
6818If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
6819framing box is printed around the header.
6820
6821The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
6822`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
6823
6824The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
6825`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
6826`ps-header-font-size'.
6827
6828*** Font managing
6829
6830The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
6831used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
6832`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
6833elements to this alist.
6834
6835The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
6836for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
6837
6838** hideshow changes.
6839
6840*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
6841C++, ; for lisp).
6842
6843*** Support for java-mode added.
6844
6845*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
6846in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
6847
6848*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
6849the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
6850way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
6851
6852*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
6853robust and a lot faster.
6854
6855*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
6856
6857*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
6858to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
6859documentation for more details.
6860
6861** Changes in Enriched mode.
6862
6863*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
6864filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
6865of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
6866use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
6867the next time unless the fill-column is different.
6868
6869*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
6870distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
6871as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
6872as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
6873
6874** Font Lock mode
6875
6876*** Custom support
6877
6878The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
6879font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
6880faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
6881group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
6882your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
6883consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
6884
6885You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
6886
6887*** Maximum decoration
6888
6889Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
6890default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
6891of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
6892supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
6893to get the old behavior.
6894
6895*** New support
6896
6897Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
6898
6899Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
6900support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
6901
6902*** Configurable support
6903
6904Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
6905additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
6906c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
6907java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
6908list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
6909of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
6910convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
6911
6912Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
6913way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
6914it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
6915
6916*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
6917
6918You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
6919highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
6920for any mode.
6921
6922For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
6923
6924 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
6925
6926in your ~/.emacs.
6927
6928*** New faces
6929
6930Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
6931font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
6932distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
6933to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
6934
6935*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
6936
6937The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
6938cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
6939same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
6940
6941*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
6942
6943The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
6944according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
6945the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
6946non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
6947refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
6948the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
6949Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
6950
6951This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
6952For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
6953this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
6954refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
6955containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
6956the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
6957
6958As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
6959
6960Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
6961Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
6962Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
6963new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
6964
6965If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
6966settings.
6967
6968** Ada mode changes.
6969
6970*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
6971If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
6972procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
6973you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
6974stubs.
6975
6976*** There are two new commands:
6977 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
6978 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
6979
6980The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
6981`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
6982`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
6983
6984*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
6985is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
6986Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
6987
6988*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
6989formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
6990places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
6991space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
6992
6993** Scheme mode changes.
6994
6995*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
6996mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
6997for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
6998with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
6999have any effect.
7000
7001If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
7002still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
7003scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
7004variables as buffer-local variables.
7005
7006*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
7007Use M-x dsssl-mode.
7008
7009** Changes to the emacsclient program
7010
7011*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
7012USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
7013associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
7014can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
7015
7016*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
7017it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
7018buffer in Emacs.
7019
7020*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
7021use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
7022ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
7023option takes precedence.
7024
7025** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
7026constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
7027(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
7028
7029** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
7030which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
7031the current defun.
7032
7033** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
7034following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
7035
7036** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
7037and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
7038necessary).
7039
7040** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
7041if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
7042these register values no longer become completely useless.
7043If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
7044asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
7045it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
7046
7047** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
7048example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
7049be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
7050you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
7051
7052You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
7053variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
7054file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
7055revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
7056only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
7057
7058** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
7059since it applies only to the current frame.
7060
7061** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
7062file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
7063and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
7064
7065This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
7066multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
7067variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
7068tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
7069instead of just the file you are editing.
7070
7071** RefTeX mode
7072
7073RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
7074and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
7075different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
7076multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
7077turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
7078
7079C-c ( reftex-label
7080 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
7081 knows which kind of label is needed.
7082
7083C-c ) reftex-reference
7084 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
7085 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
7086
7087C-c [ reftex-citation
7088 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
7089 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
7090
7091C-c & reftex-view-crossref
7092 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
7093
7094C-c = reftex-toc
7095 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
7096 can quickly jump to every section.
7097
7098Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
7099commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
7100Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
7101reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
7102C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
7103
7104** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7105
7106*** Info documentation is now available.
7107
7108*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
7109both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
7110
7111*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
7112bibtex-user-optional-fields.
7113
7114*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
7115(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
7116
7117*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
7118entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
7119appropriate functions.
7120
7121*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
7122entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
7123
7124*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
7125been cleaned.
7126
7127*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
7128bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
7129
7130*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
7131shall be delimited.
7132
7133*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
7134bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
7135bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
7136
7137*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
7138field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
7139prefixed with `ALT'.
7140
7141*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
7142bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
7143formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
7144documentation).
7145
7146*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
7147documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
7148for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
7149
7150*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
7151comma should be inserted at end of last field.
7152
7153*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
7154alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
7155signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
7156
7157*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
7158
7159*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
7160
7161*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
7162from alien sources.
7163
7164*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
7165to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
7166crossref entries.
7167
7168*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
7169region.
7170
7171*** Added support for imenu.
7172
7173*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
7174of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
7175`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
7176`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
7177
7178*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
7179from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
7180
7181** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
7182
7183** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
7184
7185** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
7186functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
7187Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
7188as an argument.
7189
7190When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
7191and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
7192
7193** browse-url changes
7194
7195*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
7196Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
7197(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
7198non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
7199customization variables.
7200
7201*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
7202
7203*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
7204lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
7205(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
7206
7207** Changes in Ediff
7208
7209*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
7210pops up the Info file for this command.
7211
7212*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
7213the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
7214merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
7215directories).
7216
7217*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
7218and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
7219files in the same directory.
7220
7221*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
7222The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
7223related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
7224
7225** Changes in Viper
7226
7227*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
7228*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
7229 instead of vip-.
7230*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
7231*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
7232Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
7233*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
7234*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
7235*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
7236color when Viper is in insert state.
7237*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
7238Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
7239viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
7240
7241** Etags changes.
7242
7243*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
7244default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
7245Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
7246variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
7247not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
7248
7249*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
7250
7251*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
7252constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
7253
7254*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
7255recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
7256In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
7257
7258*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
7259C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
7260recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
7261methods and protocols.
7262
7263*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
7264.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
7265column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
7266paragraph name.
7267
7268*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
7269an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
7270at least M times and as many as N times.
7271
7272** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
7273in files has changed slightly.
7274
7275With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
7276time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
7277This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
7278with old time-stamp-format values.
7279
7280In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
7281(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
7282This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
7283reasons.
7284
7285In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
7286natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
7287fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
7288(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
7289time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
7290specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
7291
7292Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
7293case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
7294truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
7295
7296The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
7297being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
7298future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
7299recommended now will continue to work then.
7300
7301See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
7302details.
7303
7304** There are some additional major modes:
7305
7306dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
7307m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
7308meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
7309
7310** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
7311copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
7312into Emacs.
7313
7314** New Lisp packages include:
7315
7316*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
7317
7318*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
7319be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
7320
7321*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
7322
7323*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
7324in shell buffers.
7325
7326*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
7327See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
7328and `elint-defun'.
7329
7330*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
7331meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
7332ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
7333strings or comments.
7334
7335These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
7336abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
7337you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
7338insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
7339at these points.
7340
7341*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
7342can visit them by short forms of their names.
7343
7344*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
7345Emacs Lisp function at point.
7346
7347*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
7348
7349*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
7350switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
7351
7352*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
7353
7354*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
7355
7356*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
7357
7358*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
7359from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
7360
7361*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
7362You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
7363inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
7364original place after inserting the copy.
7365
7366*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
7367on the buffer.
7368
7369You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
7370velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
7371(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
7372
7373Enable mouse-drag with:
7374 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
7375-or-
7376 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
7377
7378*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
7379mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
7380
7381*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
7382It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
7383
7384*** ogonek
7385
7386The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
7387Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
7388platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
7389TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
7390ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
7391prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
7392instance) and vice versa.
7393
7394To use this package load it using
7395 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
7396Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
7397 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
7398 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
7399The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
7400ways of customization in `.emacs'.
7401
7402*** Interface to ph.
7403
7404Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
7405
7406The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
7407services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
7408these servers.
7409
7410*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
7411
7412*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
7413You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
7414while the real cursor does not move.
7415
7416*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
7417for visiting your favorite web sites.
7418
7419*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
7420so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
7421
7422** movemail change
7423
7424Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
7425mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
7426supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
7427user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
7428
7429This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
7430\f
7431* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
7432
7433** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
7434
7435Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
7436end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
7437Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
7438file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
7439file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
7440
7441To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
7442C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
7443coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
7444specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
7445LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
7446save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
7447\f
7448* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
7449
7450** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
7451Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
7452vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
7453Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
7454
7455** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
7456to start with w32- instead of win32-.
7457
7458In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
7459don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
7460"win".
7461
7462** Basic Lisp changes
7463
7464*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
7465evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
7466
7467*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
7468be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
7469or by the user.
7470
7471The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
7472
7473*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
7474
7475(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
7476(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
7477
7478*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
7479usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
7480its argument.
7481
7482*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
7483
7484*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
7485
7486*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
7487
7488*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
7489error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
7490include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
7491`format' function.
7492
7493*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
7494or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
7495whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
7496
7497*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
7498either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
7499adding one of these suffixes.
7500
7501*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
7502which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
7503If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
7504
7505We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
7506because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
7507
7508*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
7509
7510*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
7511You must load the `cl' library to define it.
7512
7513*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
7514conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
7515
7516 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
7517
7518BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
7519BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
7520
7521*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
7522choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
7523restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
7524works using `save-current-buffer'.
7525
7526*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
7527write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
7528of the last form.
7529
7530*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
7531which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
7532last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
7533as the last form.
7534
7535*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
7536characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
7537matches.
7538
7539For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
7540
7541*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
7542with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
7543Then it returns that string.
7544
7545For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
7546
7547(with-output-to-string
7548 (princ "The buffer is ")
7549 (princ (buffer-name)))
7550
7551returns "The buffer is foo".
7552
7553** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
7554is non-nil.
7555
7556These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
7557buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
7558characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
7559
7560*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
7561a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
7562
7563Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
7564character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
7565Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
7566position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
7567characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
7568 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
7569
7570ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
7571Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
7572non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
7573characters".
7574
7575The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
7576through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
7577"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
7578range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
7579leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
7580
7581*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
7582(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
7583multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
7584character, which may be more than one buffer position.
7585
7586This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
7587always one buffer position, need to be changed.
7588
7589However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
7590
7591*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
7592because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
7593have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
7594the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
7595guaranteed.
7596
7597*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
7598between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
7599character).
7600
7601When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
7602
7603 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
7604 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
7605 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
7606 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
7607 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
7608
7609*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
7610
7611*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
7612`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
7613more than the number of characters.
7614
7615You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
7616it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
7617\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
7618is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
7619follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
7620newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
7621
7622*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
7623and returns a string containing those characters.
7624
7625*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
7626(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
7627counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
7628character, sref signals an error.
7629
7630*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
7631in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
7632string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7633
7634*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
7635in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
7636region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7637
7638*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
7639the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
7640to a vector of the characters in it.
7641
7642*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
7643of a string. You call it as follows:
7644
7645 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
7646
7647This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
7648STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
7649This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
7650Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
7651it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
7652
7653*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
7654if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7655
7656*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
7657if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7658
7659*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
7660to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
7661not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
7662which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
7663
7664(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
7665
7666This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
7667
7668The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
7669If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
7670are not included in the resulting value.
7671
7672The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
7673at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
7674WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
7675is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
7676
7677If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
7678place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
7679character extends across that column), then the padding character
7680PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
7681string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
7682column START-COLUMN.
7683
7684*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
7685the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
7686necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
7687difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
7688changed text, before the change.
7689
7690*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
7691sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
7692one character set for each script, not for each language.
7693
7694**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
7695
7696**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
7697
7698**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
7699set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
7700
7701**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
7702name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
7703which identify the character within that character set.
7704
7705**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
7706byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
7707opposite of split-char.
7708
7709**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
7710of all the characters between BEG and END.
7711
7712**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
7713of all the characters in a string.
7714
7715*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
7716and specifying coding systems.
7717
7718**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
7719system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
7720of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
7721(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
7722and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
7723as what to do about code conversion.)
7724
7725**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
7726name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
7727
7728**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7729for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7730except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
7731
7732Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7733which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
7734to match against a file name.
7735
7736VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7737a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7738decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7739to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7740systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7741specifies the coding system for encoding.
7742
7743If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7744or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7745
7746**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
7747the coding system to use for network sockets.
7748
7749Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7750which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
7751either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
7752service names.
7753
7754VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7755a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7756decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7757to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7758systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7759specifies the coding system for encoding.
7760
7761If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7762or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7763
7764**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7765for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7766except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
7767start the subprocess.
7768
7769**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
7770systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
7771when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
7772(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
7773to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
7774
7775**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
7776coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
7777subprocess.
7778
7779It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
7780but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
7781start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
7782connection permanently or until overridden.
7783
7784The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
7785file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
7786network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
7787coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
7788It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
7789system for one operation at a time.
7790
7791**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
7792files, subprocesses or network connections.
7793
7794**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
7795coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
7796The value is a cons cell,
7797 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
7798where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
7799the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
7800input to the subprocess.
7801
7802**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
7803change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
7804
7805** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
7806customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
7807you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
7808
7809You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
7810variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
7811information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
7812legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
7813customization.
7814
7815Thus, instead of writing
7816
7817 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
7818 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
7819
7820you would now write this:
7821
7822 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
7823 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
7824 :type 'boolean
7825 :group foo)
7826
7827The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
7828two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
7829describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
7830for a description of them.
7831
7832The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
7833should belong to. You define a new group like this:
7834
7835 (defgroup ispell nil
7836 "Spell checking using Ispell."
7837 :group 'processes)
7838
7839The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
7840group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
7841but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
7842to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
7843second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
7844
7845Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
7846package should have just one group; a more complex package should
7847have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
7848package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
7849first-level subgroups.
7850
7851** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
7852
7853This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
7854separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
7855
7856** easy-mmode
7857
7858The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
7859developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
7860only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
7861predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
7862`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
7863`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
7864
7865** Text property changes
7866
7867*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
7868text property.
7869
7870*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
7871previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
7872place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
7873functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
7874starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
7875
7876If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
7877LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
7878of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
7879position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
7880
7881*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
7882value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
7883is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
7884
7885** Changes in invisibility features
7886
7887*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
7888hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
7889is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
7890should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
7891would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
7892make the overlay visible.
7893
7894During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
7895invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
7896needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
7897which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
7898the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
7899t when it should hide it.
7900
7901*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
7902
7903Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
7904invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
7905and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
7906Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
7907manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
7908Here is an example of how to do this:
7909
7910 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
7911 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7912 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
7913 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7914
7915 ...
7916 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
7917
7918 ...
7919 ;; When done with the overlays:
7920 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7921 ;; Or respectively:
7922 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7923
7924** Changes in syntax parsing.
7925
7926*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
7927`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
7928obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
7929`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
7930
7931If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
7932is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
7933used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
7934
7935When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
7936character in the buffer is calculated thus:
7937
7938 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
7939 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
7940
7941 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
7942 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
7943 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
7944
7945 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
7946 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
7947 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
7948 determine the syntax type of the character.
7949
7950 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
7951 of the current buffer.
7952
7953*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
7954value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
7955for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
7956
7957*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
7958and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
7959only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
7960character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
7961another character with the same code (unless quoted).
7962
7963These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
7964text property.
7965
7966*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
7967arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
7968of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
7969
7970*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
7971(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
7972element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
7973nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
7974string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
7975
7976*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
7977syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
7978`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
7979
7980** Changes in face features
7981
7982*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
7983if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
7984
7985*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
7986of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
7987
7988*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
7989set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
7990
7991*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
7992set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
7993
7994*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
7995by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
7996and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
7997the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
7998overlay property).
7999
8000This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
8001arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
8002
8003** Changes in file-handling functions
8004
8005*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
8006directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
8007they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
8008is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
8009
8010This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
8011begins with ~.
8012
8013*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
8014it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
8015
8016*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
8017the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
8018
8019*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
8020as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
8021
8022*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
8023character code conversion as well as other things.
8024
8025Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
8026(formerly it did not).
8027
8028*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
8029environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
8030
8031*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
8032instead of constant strings.
8033
8034*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
8035to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
8036any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
8037
8038substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
8039in the same way as before.
8040
8041*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
8042The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
8043which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
8044
8045*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
8046error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
8047else, and returns nil.
8048
8049*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
8050directory cannot be listed.
8051
8052** Changes in minibuffer input
8053
8054*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
8055read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
8056additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
8057argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
8058ways:
8059
8060 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
8061 It is available through the history command M-n.
8062
8063*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
8064read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
8065argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
8066minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
8067enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
8068
8069In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
8070argument in this way.
8071
8072*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
8073from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
8074minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
8075
8076** Echo area features
8077
8078*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
8079echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
8080minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
8081after the echo area is cleared.
8082
8083*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
8084in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
8085
8086** Keyboard input features
8087
8088*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
8089set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
8090
8091*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
8092received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
8093by keyboard macros.
8094
8095** Frame-related changes
8096
8097*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
8098creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
8099hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
8100
8101*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
8102the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
8103has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
8104
8105*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
8106selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
8107value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
8108in the selected frame.
8109
8110*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
8111is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
8112which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
8113
8114** X Windows features
8115
8116*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
8117x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
8118x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
8119
8120*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
8121The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
8122
8123*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
8124MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
8125A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
8126
8127If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
8128it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
8129
8130** Subprocess features
8131
8132*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
8133functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
8134automatically.
8135
8136*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
8137and returns the output from the command as a string.
8138
8139*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
8140and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
8141
8142** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
8143does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
8144
8145** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
8146at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
8147goes after the other menu items.
8148
8149** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
8150of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
8151around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
8152are in use.
8153
8154The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
8155series of several changes--if that seems safe.
8156
8157Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
8158after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
8159form.
8160
8161** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
8162is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
8163but its hook is still run.
8164
8165** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
8166for errors that are handled by condition-case.
8167
8168If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
8169regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
8170useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
8171
8172This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
8173are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
8174filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
8175warned.
8176
8177** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
8178way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
8179
8180** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
8181integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
8182functions like display-time.
8183
8184** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
8185name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
8186
8187** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
8188can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
8189is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
8190
8191** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
8192if there is an error in compilation.
8193
8194** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
8195switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
8196argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
8197they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
8198
8199** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
8200Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
8201the *scratch* buffer.
8202
8203** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
8204The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
8205where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
8206e.g., in Font Lock mode.
8207
8208** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
8209and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
8210It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
8211
8212** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
8213using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
8214variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
8215and compose-mail-other-frame.
8216
8217** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
8218can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
8219full name of the specified user will be returned.
8220
8221** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
8222of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
8223where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
8224in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
8225option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
8226files at all.
8227
8228** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
8229and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
8230width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
8231the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
8232
8233For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
8234minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
8235with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
8236is how %S normally pads to two positions.
8237
8238** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
8239
8240** imenu.el changes.
8241
8242You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
8243item from menu created by imenu.
8244
8245An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
8246#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
8247select one of those items.
8248\f
8249* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
8250\f
8251* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
8252
8253** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
8254mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
8255
8256** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
8257use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
8258Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
8259\f
8260* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
8261
8262** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
8263To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
8264
8265** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
8266conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
8267matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
8268expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
8269word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
8270all caps.
8271
8272** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
8273at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
8274
8275When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
8276does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
8277as in previous Emacs versions.
8278
8279** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
8280non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
8281time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
8282frames.
8283
8284** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
8285if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
8286This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
8287Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
8288accident.
8289
8290** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
8291keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
8292It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
8293line and then executing the macro.
8294
8295This command is not new, but was never documented before.
8296
8297** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
8298(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
8299characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
8300characters.
8301
8302** Font Lock mode
8303
8304*** Font Lock support modes
8305
8306Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
8307below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
8308hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
8309to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
8310Font Lock mode is enabled.
8311
8312For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
8313
8314 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
8315
8316in your ~/.emacs.
8317
8318*** lazy-lock
8319
8320The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
8321only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
8322becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
8323Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
8324occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
8325buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
8326Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
8327
8328To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
8329
8330 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
8331
8332To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
8333
8334** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8335
8336*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
8337paren and key.
8338
8339*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
8340supported.
8341
8342** Gnus changes.
8343
8344Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
8345commands and variables have been added. There should be no
8346significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
8347previously released version, except in the message composition area.
8348
8349Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
8350between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
8351
8352*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
8353variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
8354obsolete.
8355
8356*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
8357missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
8358
8359 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
8360
8361*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
8362
8363 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
8364
8365*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
8366referred.
8367
8368*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
8369
8370 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
8371
8372*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
8373
8374 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
8375
8376*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
8377buffers.
8378
8379 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
8380
8381*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
8382
8383 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
8384
8385*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
8386
8387 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
8388
8389*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
8390
8391 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
8392
8393*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
8394is possible.
8395
8396 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
8397
8398*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
8399groups of groups.
8400
8401*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
8402
8403*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
8404batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
8405
8406*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
8407
8408*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
8409
8410*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
8411
8412 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
8413
8414*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
8415expiration times.
8416
8417*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
8418
8419*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
8420process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
8421
8422*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
8423articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
8424bound to keys on the `/' submap.
8425
8426*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
8427articles with the `*' command.
8428
8429*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
8430
8431*** Article headers can be buttonized.
8432
8433 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
8434
8435*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
8436
8437*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
8438`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
8439
8440*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
8441buffer.
8442
8443*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
8444
8445*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
8446
8447*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
8448
8449 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
8450
8451*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
8452
8453 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
8454
8455*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
8456
8457*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
8458
8459*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
8460
8461 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
8462 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
8463
8464*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
8465refetching.
8466
8467 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
8468
8469*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
8470buffer to allow easier treatment.
8471
8472*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
8473
8474*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
8475
8476 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
8477
8478*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
8479articles.
8480
8481 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
8482
8483*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
8484
8485*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
8486cited text to hide is now customizable.
8487
8488 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
8489
8490*** Boring headers can be hidden.
8491
8492 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
8493
8494*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
8495
8496*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
8497
8498The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
8499in greater detail.
8500\f
8501* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
8502
8503** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
8504second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
8505asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
8506exists.
8507
8508** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
8509as well as lists.
8510
8511** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
8512of a given keymap.
8513
8514** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
8515given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
8516keymap or nil.
8517
8518** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
8519an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
8520name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
8521menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
8522equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
8523alias.
8524\f
8525* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
8526
8527** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
8528
8529Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
8530This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
8531was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
8532far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
8533pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
8534
8535For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
8536you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
8537`http://www.vtw.org/'.
8538
8539** A note about C mode indentation customization.
8540
8541The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
8542do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
8543It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
8544much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
8545chapter of the manual for details.
8546
8547However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
8548customization variables take effect.
8549
8550** Marking with the mouse.
8551
8552When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
8553highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
8554using M-x transient-mark-mode.
8555
8556** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
8557
8558*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
8559
8560*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
8561to work on NT only and not on 95.)
8562
8563*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
8564in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
8565you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
8566application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
8567applications, these problems are significant.
8568
8569If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
8570likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
8571However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
8572will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
8573other DOS application as a subprocess.
8574
8575Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
8576You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
8577
8578If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
8579subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
8580have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
8581Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
8582separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
8583Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
8584
8585** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
8586
8587This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
8588which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
8589minibuffer contains.
8590
8591** `title' frame parameter and resource.
8592
8593The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
8594It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
8595It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
8596affects just the displayed title of the frame.
8597
8598The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
8599it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
8600and also serves as the default for the displayed title
8601when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
8602
8603** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
8604enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
8605
8606** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
8607F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
8608Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
8609
8610If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
8611menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
8612something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
8613the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
8614
8615 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
8616
8617** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
8618to replace the characters it "deletes".
8619
8620** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
8621
8622** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
8623a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
8624select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
8625It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
8626immediately after the selected one.
8627
8628This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
8629made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
8630
8631** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
8632
8633Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
8634directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
8635If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
8636Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
8637recover-session.
8638
8639You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
8640auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
8641will not work.
8642
8643Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
8644normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
8645this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
8646bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
8647now that the bug is fixed.
8648
8649** Changes to Version Control (VC)
8650
8651There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
8652when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
8653Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
8654which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
8655
8656If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
8657telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
8658VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
8659the link is visited and a warning displayed.
8660
8661** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
8662Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
8663is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
8664
8665There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
8666Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
8667enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
8668The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
8669remain normal.
8670
8671** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
8672header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
8673
8674Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
8675known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
8676offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
8677Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
8678
8679Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
8680of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
8681a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
8682name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
8683documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
8684`mail-directory-stream'.)
8685
8686** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
8687skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
8688characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
8689with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
8690
8691Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
8692- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
8693wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
8694
8695The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
8696less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
8697headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
8698Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
8699Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
8700fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
8701to a limitation in font-lock).
8702
8703External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
8704
8705** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
8706buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
8707buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
8708this example:
8709
8710 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
8711 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
8712
8713** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8714
8715*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
8716
8717*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
8718
8719*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
8720
8721*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
8722entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
8723will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
8724isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
8725(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
8726The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
8727
8728*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
8729does the same job.
8730
8731*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
8732"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
8733
8734*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
8735text.
8736
8737** Font Lock mode
8738
8739*** Global Font Lock mode
8740
8741Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
8742new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
8743font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
8744turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
8745on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
8746
8747For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
8748
8749 (global-font-lock-mode t)
8750
8751in your ~/.emacs.
8752
8753*** Local Refontification
8754
8755In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
8756However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
8757those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
8758command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
8759
8760In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
8761(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
8762current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
8763above and below point.
8764
8765With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
8766
8767** Follow mode
8768
8769Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
8770buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
8771side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
8772they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
8773split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
8774follow-mode.
8775
8776M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
8777
8778To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
8779command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
8780
8781** hide-show changes.
8782
8783The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
8784to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
8785normal hooks.
8786
8787** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
8788The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
8789
8790** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
8791recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
8792those that begin a function, record, or macro.
8793
8794** MSDOS Changes
8795
8796*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
8797Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
8798
8799*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
8800and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
8801
8802*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
8803
8804*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
8805pressing both mouse buttons.
8806
8807*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
8808restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
8809are:
8810
8811**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
8812now works.
8813
8814**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
8815
8816**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
8817implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
8818
8819**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
8820
8821**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
8822
8823**** `M-x recover-session' works.
8824
8825**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
8826
8827**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
8828\f
8829* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
8830
8831** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
8832tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
8833remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
8834this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
8835behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
8836
8837** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
8838
8839The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
8840not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
8841need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
8842be different.
8843
8844It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
8845than `system-type'.
8846
8847See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
8848
8849** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
8850now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
8851
8852** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
8853that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
8854
8855** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
8856no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
8857reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
8858
8859The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
8860to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
8861like this:
8862
8863 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8864
8865SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
8866It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
8867becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
8868
8869REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
8870seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
8871means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
8872
8873*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
8874up if too much time passes.
8875
8876 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
8877
8878This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
8879If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
8880of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
8881form in BODY.
8882
8883*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
8884a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
8885call looks like this:
8886
8887 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8888
8889SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
8890runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
8891timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
8892ARGS.
8893
8894Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
8895command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
8896command.
8897
8898REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
8899time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
8900does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
8901each time Emacs becomes idle.
8902
8903If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
8904idle for SECS seconds.
8905
8906*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
8907all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
8908programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
8909instead.
8910
8911*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
8912there is no answer within a certain time.
8913
8914 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
8915
8916asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
8917within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
8918Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
8919
8920** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
8921arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
8922meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
8923arguments in between are ignored.
8924
8925This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
8926the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
8927
8928** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
8929/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
8930/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
8931site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
8932version.
8933
8934It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
8935version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
8936for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
8937has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
8938and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
8939problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
8940
8941** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
8942.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
8943systems with limited file name syntax.
8944
8945Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
8946convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
8947for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
8948completions.el:
8949
8950(defvar save-completions-file-name
8951 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
8952 "*The filename to save completions to.")
8953
8954This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
8955depends on the operating system, because the definition of
8956convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
8957Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
8958MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
8959
8960** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
8961rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
8962minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
8963
8964** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
8965marker from its buffer position.
8966
8967** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
8968Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
8969The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
8970
8971** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
8972that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
8973condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
8974of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
8975matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
8976regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
8977
8978This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
8979errors that happen often during editing.
8980
8981** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
8982into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
8983puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
8984
8985** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
8986now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
8987
8988** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
8989a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
8990name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
8991to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
8992and not get-buffer-window.
8993
8994** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
8995calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
8996being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
8997
8998If you use this feature, you should set the variable
8999buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
9000property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
9001non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
9002are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
9003property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
9004over and over for the same text.
9005
9006** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
9007
9008*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
9009in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
9010
9011;; @(#) HEADER: text
9012;; $HEADER: text $
9013
9014in addition to the normal
9015
9016;; HEADER: text
9017
9018*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
9019checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
9020lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
9021
9022
a933dad1 9023\f
3787e12e 9024* For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
9025
9026----------------------------------------------------------------------
9027Copyright information:
9028
424d8b44 9029Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
9030
9031 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
9032 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
9033 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
9034 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
9035
9036 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
9037 of this document, or of portions of it,
9038 under the above conditions, provided also that they
9039 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
9040\f
9041Local variables:
9042mode: outline
9043paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
9044end: